Owner's Manual for Vehicle the Ultimate Driving Machine

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

The Ultimate Driving Machine

650i Owner's Manual for Vehicle Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW. Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore have this request: Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical features. The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service life. This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa- tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. We wish you an enjoyable driving experience. BMW AG © 2007 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. Order No. 01 41 0 014 242 US English VIII/07, 07 09 500 Printed in Germany Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling. 7 4 Using this Owner's Manual the index, refer to page tofind fastest way specific The is topics to use Contents 199 184 Communications 179 178 172 169 162 158 Entertainment 155 146 134 132 Navigation 124 Driving tips 115 108 102 85 74 58 56 47 28 Controls 23 16 10 glanceAt a Reporting safety defects Notes BMW Assist BMW Telephoning interface USB/audio AUX-In connection CDplayer and CDchanger Satellite radio Radio and tone On/off … if do to What Destination guidance Destination entry system navigation Starting Things to remember when driving Practical interior accessories Climate Lamps safety and Technology for comfort, convenience Everything under control Driving Transporting childrensafely Adjusting Opening and closing system command Voice iDrive Cockpit 242 . 242 238 234 Reference 227 223 221 216 210 208 Mobility Everything from toZ from A Everything system Short commands of voice command Technical data assistance receiving and Giving Replacing components Maintenance hood the Under Wheels and tires Refueling

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Notes vehicle. your of component important an is it well; as ual please remember to pass on the Owner's Man- Should you want to sell this find in firstthe chapter. will you vehicle, your of overview initial an gain atthe index manual. ofthe back wishIf you to the specificto is touse find detailed topics way The quicklyfastest as possible. as Manual are able to find what you need in this Owner's haveWe made every effort to ensure that you Manual Using thisOwner's Notes ogy, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com. You canfind information BMW center will be happytoadvise you. Should you have any other questions, your Additional sources of information 4 your BMW some day, some your BMW on BMW, technol-e.g. on BMW, for your vehicle. vehicle and enable you to care more effectively the vehicle. to damage serious and injury ofpersonal sibility information on a particular part or assembly. or part particular a on information tion. < voice command system. command voice {{ system. command { individualselect functions. to used texts Control Display Identifies "..." ofprinting.time andfunctions not equipment available yet at the cific equipment and optional extras, as well as * Symbols used Symbols on vehicle components vehicle on Symbols ...... Indicates special equipment, country-spe- equipment, special Indicates } Marks the end of a specificMarks a end of theitem informa- of }} Verbal instructions to use with the voice the with use to instructions Verbal Identifies the answers generated by the help protect the environment. to taken that canbe to measures Refers your optimum benefitfrom gaining the in Indicates informationthat willassist you lowed precisely in order toavoid the pos- be Indicates that must fol- precautions evant section ofthis Owner's for Manual Indicates consultthat should you rel- the < < < The individual vehicle Editorial notice When purchasing your BMW, you have decided BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing in favor of a model with individualized equip- development that is conceived to ensure that ment and features. This Owner's Manual our vehicles continue to embody the highest glance a At describes all models and equipment offered by quality and safety standards combined with BMW within the same line. advanced, state-of-the-art technology. In iso- Please bear in mind that the manual may con- lated cases it is possible that the features tain information on accessories and equipment described in this Owner's Manual could differ that you have not specified for your own vehicle. from those on your vehicle. Sections describing options and special equip- Controls ment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in identifying possible differences between the descriptions in this manual and your own vehicle's equipment. If equipment in your BMW is not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom- panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals. Driving tips Navigation Entertainment Communications Mobility

5 Reference Notes ards. subsequent damage and related safety haz- ried out properly, there is a danger of car- not is work this If personnel. trained ately repairing toBMW procedures with appropri- accord- works that aworkshop or center BMW onyourwork performed only BMW your by nance and repair methods. Have corresponding mainte- adapted specially requires electronics, Maintenance and repairs and Maintenance For your own safety soap and water. and soap protect your skin by washing thoroughly with caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always have engine chemicals oil contains that Used your hands after handling. ries contain lead andlead Wash compounds. accesso- andrelated terminals posts, Battery reproductive harm. to cause cancer and birth defects or other emit chemicals known to the State of California wearcertain contain products or of component certainaddition, fluidsin contained vehicles and In harm. reproductive and defects birth and cancer to cause of California State to the known nishings ina vehicle, contain or emit chemicals including found in components interiorthe fur- warning: following the issue to us requires law California California Proposition 65 Warning < modern materials and high-performance Advanced technology, e.g. the use of automobile components and parts, Engine exhaust and a wide variety of 6 < tified automotive part. automotive tified repair establishment or individual using anycer- automotive performedby any be may tems center information. additional BMW for your Warranty. Limited validitySee the BMW ofthe fere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect totheage safety, vehicle,inter- its compromise similar accessories, may cause extensive dam- or radios ham walkie-talkies, CBs, instance, equipment, transceiver for or antenna, mounted the within usingvehicle anexternally without including operation of any mobile phone from telephones, shields, dust brake components, suspension wheels, detectors, radar amplifiers, radios, asalarms, such accessories approved Installation and operationofnon-BMW are available from all centers.BMW with professional advice on using these items, other products approvedby togetherBMW, and Accessories BMW Parts, BMW Genuine cle, its occupants. operation, or its andwithout safely risk BMW to theeither vehi- manufacturers toverify ifit canbe used ona BMW cannot test every product made by other BMW. by approved ries not resulting from installation of parts and accesso- liability notaccept any will damage for BMW defects in material and workmanship. BMW warrants these parts to be free from on your vehicle. ensure optimum performance when installed have thoroughly to they been BMW by tested that assurance the acquire simultaneously you andGenuineapproved byBMW BMWParts, and tested accessories purchase you When Parts and accessoriesParts and the emission control devices and sys- and devices control emission the replacement,Maintenance, orrepair of and accessories approvedby BMW. parts genuine use safety, your own For < < Service and warranty Reporting safety defects We recommend that you read this publication For US customers thoroughly.

The following applies only to vehicles owned glance a At Your BMW is covered by the following warran- and operated in the US. ties: If you believe that your vehicle has a defect > New Vehicle Limited Warranty which could cause a crash or could cause injury > Rust Perforation Limited Warranty or death, you should immediately inform the > Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty National Highway Traffic Safety Administration > Federal Emissions Performance Warranty (NHTSA) in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Controls > California Emission Control System Limited Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone (800) 831- Warranty 1117. Detailed information about these warranties is If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may listed in the Service and Warranty Information open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

a recall and remedy campaign. However, Driving tips NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you and your dealer or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis- Navigation trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers Entertainment Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call 1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa region and from other countries, or contact

Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Communications Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca Mobility

7 Reference

At a glance

This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the control concepts and options available for operating the various systems. Cockpit 5 4 6 2 3 Around the steering wheel: controls and displays Cockpit 1 Exterior mirrors, folding in in out folding and mirrors, Exterior windows front closing and Opening Automatic curb monitor Automatic mirrors exterior Adjusting together Convertible: opening andclosing windows windows Convertible: andclosingopening rear window Convertible: andclosingopening rear 39 10 39 39 54 53 53 38 7 Computer Check Control lampsRoadside parking High-beam assistant High-beam flasher headlamp High beams, Turn signals 75 63 79 104 * 104 104 10 14 11 8 9 13 12 Buttons on steering wheel onsteering Buttons Instrument cluster Horn, entiresurface Ignition lock Leaving lane warning lane Leaving Individually programmable Steeringadjustment wheel command system Activating/deactivating voice Volume > Windshield wipers Steeringheater wheel switching ignition on/off Starting/stopping engine and sensor Rain Individually programmable with numbers phone stored lists in and book phone in Scrolling track music Selecting Changing radio station > Mobile phone Press and hold: redialing selected redialing if no phone number is selected phone number and call, starting dialing starting call, Press: accepting and ending 58 12 64 * 184 * 64 * 23 * * 173 101 162 for 54 58 * 55 54 55

20 19 18 17 15 16 Releasing hood Adaptive Head Light Head Adaptive Welcome lamps Fog lamps Instrument lighting Daytime running lamps headlampAutomatic control Welcome lamps beams Low lamps Parking BMW Night Vision Head-Up Display lid compartmentOpening luggage Active cruise control Cruise control 34 216 106 102 * 11 102 * 65 102 102 * 96 * 106 98 66 * 104 103 102

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Cockpit 6 5 7 4 Instrument cluster 3 2 1 Engine oil temperature oil Engine Tachometer > > > > > > Display for > Displays for Indicator and warning lamps Speedometer turn signals for Indicator lamps Leaving lane warning lane Leaving control Desired speed for active cruise Speed forcruise control Indicator warninglamps and temperature Outside Time/date Active cruise control 12 * 70 74 74 * * * 74 75 66 101 66 13 79 10 9 8 Resetting trip odometer Resetting Fuel gauge > > > > > > > Display for Sport automatic transmission automatic Sport service requirements for distancetravel remaining and Date Computer High-beam assistant High-beam Dynamic Driving Control Odometer and trip odometer Check Control message present message Control Check 75 75 * 74 104 77 62 74 60 79 to page concept The Indicator andwarning lamps function or the appropriat the or function regard e.g. information, You can consult Check Control for additional displayed indicator and warning lamps. Control Display explain the meaning of the Text messages at the bottom edgeof the Explanatory text messages cess. proper operation and light upbriefly in the pro- switched on, some lamps are checked for the orWhen ignition is started engine the is colors. and combinations different in up light can lamps warning and indicator The 79 . ing the cause of a mal- e actions to take, refer to e refer actions take, functions: The following indicator lamps signal particular Indicator lamps without text messages as soon as the soon as as corresponding lamp lights up. willbe shown this information In urgentcases, models Canadian for levels emissions deteriorating with malfunction Engine levels emissions deteriorating with malfunction Engine DTC Dynamic Traction Control stability maintain vehicle to forces braking and drive the controlling is DTC or DSC flashes: Lamp Handbrake for Canadianmodels Handbrake applied Fog lamps High beams/headlamp flasher 222 87 106 222 13 60 104 88

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Cockpit Around the center console: controls anddisplays 14 7 2 11 6 8 10 9 3 5 4 1 system request Convertible: initiating SOS emergency airbags for telephone for Coupe: microphone for hands-free mode Automatic climate control Indicator lamp Control Display Central locking system locking Central Hazard warningflashers Reading lamps Reading column Convertible: microphone on steering request Coupe: initiatingemergency SOS Interior lamps function Coupe: glass sunroof, electric with raise * * Rear window defroster window Rear condensation Defrosting windows and removing Air volume control climate automatic off Switching mode heat Residual Maximum cooling mode Recirculated-air control recirculated-air Automatic AUC Cooling function volume airAutomatic distribution and left/right Temperature setting, * 95 227 23 227 40 *

for front passenger passenger front for and voice command voice and 106 107 112 111 109 16 108 110 110 32 111 108 111 112 111 108 17 16 20 19 21 22 15 14 18 13 12 and adjusting volume adjusting and outputon/off sound Entertainment Drive for audio CDs system navigation Controller Bracket for cup holder Opening start menu on Control Display directions four in horizontally move or press Turn, Dynamic Driving Control Drive for navigation DVD in Professional buttons Programmable memory/direct selection > > Ejecting > > Changing audio CD navigation DVD track radio station top Convertible: closing the convertible top ible Convertible: opening the convert- DTC Dynamic TractionControl PDC Park DistancePDC Park Control Heated seats 21 173 16 43 173 43 163 * 132 173 * 132 15 159 118 53 62 * 85 * 17 88

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance iDrive Controls section provides anintroduction tobasic menu following The position. central a from operated switches. This allows these functions to be iDrive combines the functions of a multitude of iDrive 3 2 1 > > > by: settings change and items You can use the controller to select menu Controller theOpening start menu Control Display pressing, arrow turning, arrow moving in four directions, arrows button 16 5 6 4 unless traffic and road conditions allow. conditions road and traffic unless controls entries to use the make attempt or cle's occupants and other road users, never equipment. indescribed connection withrelevant the individualnavigation. Thecontrolof functions is essarily endangeringvehi- your both own avoid becomingTo distracted and unnec- < > > Navigation oronboardinformation > > Communication Menu overview > > > > > > > > Climate > > Entertainment menu age fuel consumption age aver- ofthe displaying for e.g.info, Onboard system Navigation Assist BMW Telephone Settings Settings telephone for the lines for legally mandated inspections dead- and intervals ofmaintenance Display system locking forSettings your e.g.vehicle, the for central Tone and display settings Display Control the off Switching operationParked car programs Automatic settings Vent player changer CD CD and Radio * * or TeleService * * * prx 0seconds. 10 approx. hidden is automatically after message The This displays menu. start the Press the controller. To hide themessage: play: lowing message is shown on the Control Dis- page to refer readiness, radio From Basic operation rs h buttontwice. the Press button. menu: the the from To open start menu the Press start menu Opening items. five menu You can call up all thefunctions of iDrive using menu Start 17 58 , the fol-

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance iDrive Opening menu items of start menu start of items menu Opening onds. sponding direction and holditfor approx.2 sec- To do so, move the controller in the corre- > > offers option the you of: opening Comfort items of menu openingComfort troller. menu by pressing the con- You can open the back. or forward, right, left, tainment, andClimate bymoving the controller menu items Communication, Navigation, Enter- cancall menu, you start the fourFrom up the ihu rsigte button without thepressing andClimate Entertainment Navigation, Direct changing between Communication, the view last selected Opening a menu item of the start menuin 18 3 2 1 2 1 Displays in menu numerically. or graphically displayed are Settings ible. other menu items that are not currently vis- indicateArrows the possibility of accessing lists. vertical or tal Menu items are usually grouped in horizon- menu: start the of item last selected the menu indicates A symbol rently selected field appears brighter. Each menuis divided into fields. Thecur- Climate Entertainment info onboard or Navigation Communication menu 3 2 1 view. this in described is iDrive via operation Basic Operating principle at a glance Selecting a menu item: refer to 1 to refer item: menu a Selecting > > item: Activating amenu > > item: menu Selecting function is out carried New menuitems are displayed or Press controller selected by marking by selected be can white in shown items Menu Turn controller; marking moves 5 4 ee to page refer onControl Display,Settings Setting time, You can view the individual steps under > > > settings: Adjusting > > > Changing between fields: Confirmation byConfirmation changing field displays can be changed text or value numerical display, Graphic Turn controller Active fieldActive lighterappears Release controller or back left, controller forward right, move Briefly 82 . 19

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance iDrive 3 2 tem entries are made via the voice command sys- or appears information Control Check When Other displays: 6 4 den. 5 Status information 1 received is traffic information thattransmits Station sound off output Entertainment Time mobile phone network, dependenton phone is paired in the vehicle > tem sys- the for navigation information Traffic "TI": > Display for: switched on > > > Display for: * , the status information is temporarily hid- temporarily is information , the status Telephoning rmBWAssist BMW from Existingconnection voicea service with "BMW Assist" "BMW search or no network Name of linked mobile phone, network Telephone CD Radio, Entertainment: Reception strength ofmobile phone

Newentries present in"Missedcalls" can be received and transmission is is transmission and received be can Roaming active Roaming * 20 : * * in "Communication": is possible if the mobile * : * Selecting display > > > tance window: the assis- in appears information Additional Assistance window* 3. 2. 1. the current position the system with view map navigation arrow or the or computer the tripthe computer Press the controller. Select amenuitem. troller. assistancethe window and presscon- the to controller change the right tothe to Move * 2. 1. Switchingwindow assistance on/off 3. 2. 1. on/off Switching Control Display and press the controller. switchTo the on, change to assistance window Toswitch on, presscontroller. the controller. the press and off" window "Assist. Select troller. con- the press and window assistance the to change rightto the to controller the Move ler. Select "Display andpress off" the control- menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press control currently in use. direct selection buttonsis stored thefor remote The assignment of the programmable memory/ Destinations of navigation Destinations function Saving > > > buttons: on the programmable memory/direct selection You cansave andrun certain functions ofiDrive direct selection buttons memory/ Programmable name will also stored. be also will name nameIf is a assigned to the phone number, the 2. 1. numbers phone Telephone, > > features: Special 2. 1. > > > > Entertainment: Telephone, phone numbers navigation of Destinations Press the ... button button longer ... than 2seconds. the Press list. A-Z of the stored phone numbers, e.g. of the Enter theselect phone numberor list it ina current destination. notthe stored, are cursor atthe coordinates During destination entry via a map, the tion isstored. button longer the viewmap started, the current destina- With the destination guidance system and ... than 2seconds. the Press destination list or theaddress book. Select navigation destination, e.g. in the AUX CD compartment of CD changer ofCD compartment CD CD radio station 21 *

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance iDrive compressed audio files. audio compressed 2. 1. play. regardless of the selection on the Control Dis- stored, is station, aradio e.g. heard, currently In the the menu, Entertainment sound source Entertainment oc h . button. ... is displayed. buttons ofthe assignment The the Touch Displaying short info an e.g. object, pen, doesa notfunction. not wear gloves when doing so. Touching with touchingby with your them finger. do Please ofthe candisplay buttons You the assignment Displaying button assignment button. selected. is anavigation destination when started is ance tion established, or also is the guid-destination ... When selecting a phone number, the connec- the Press function Running Notassigned Telephone, phonenumber source Entertainment Destination of navigation system Press the ... button longer longer button ... than 2 seconds. the Press ortion CD. Select the desired function, radioe.g. sta- the currentthe with is track CDs for stored If the vehicle is equipped with two drives, 22 < 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. button longer. 1. ... Deleting button assignments the Touch Displaying detailedinformation Acknowledge with "Yes". keys" presscontroller. and the Select "Delete assignment of all memory press the controller. Select "Programmable Memory Keys" and troller. con- the press and Tires" / "Vehicle Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press > > The microphone is located: microphone. The voice command system includes a special ofinstructions or form questions. selected systems and provides support in the the intofor controlsignals commands spoken The voice command system transforms your touse having controller.the can be spoken as commands. This frees you of Display Control the on items menu Individual out taking your hands off the steering wheel. with- ofvarious vehicle trolsystems operation The voice command system allows you to con- The concept system command Voice Symbols in Owner's Manual in Symbols iDrive language,refer topage guage for the voice command system. Setting tobe use iDrive mands spoken, lan-to set the com- the of identification enable to In order Prerequisite On the steering column in the Convertible page to refer Coupe, Near the interior rearview mirror in the {{ word. command system. { ...... } }} Say the specified commands word for for word commands specified the Say Indicates the responses of the voice ofthe the voice Indicates responses 14 84 . when when caninputyou additional commands. 2. 1. Activating voice command system Voice commands This symbol is shown on the Control Display Display Control onthe shown is symbol This Display. The iscommand displayed on the Control Say the command. mands. command system can respond tocom- voice you the signal tell that an acoustic button. the Press * This symbol on the Control Display and and Display Control the on symbol This 23

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Voice command system ate the equipment using iDrive. using equipment the ate If no other commands are possible, then oper- Having possible commands read aloud Commands buttononthe steering wheel or the Press command Terminating orcancelingvoice Opening startmenu topage refer selected, is item menu which of regardless directly, tions shortWith commands youcanrun certain func- commands short with directly functions Running e.g.: function, a running for commands several often are There Using alternative commands Opening help changer for operating the CD player and the CD system willaloud readthe possible commands For example, if you have selected "CD", the mands: com- possible the list system the have To item on the Control Display. related tothe selectedble menu commands You can have the system read aloud thepossi- { { { { { Cancel Options Help Main menu Radio on Radio * . }

} } 24 } or } { Turn radioTurn on 238 . } 5. 2. 1. An example: selectingAn atrack rs h buttonon the steering wheel. Pressthe buttonon the steering wheel. Pressthe necessary. outputif sound Switch onEntertainment 6. 4. 3. {{ says: system The { e.g.: atrack, Select {{ says: system The { {{ says: system The { rc 1 Track CD Entertainment rc 1 Track CD on Entertainment } }} } }} } }} > > > > > > mind: For voice commands, bear the following in page Notes while speaking. Avoid background noises in the vehicle interferenceambient from noise. roof Keep the doors, windows and glass sun- abbreviations. voice command system and do not use in the book, only names ofthe use language entries For the phone in voice-activated usual pronunciation of thestation name. When selecting a radio station, use the the voice command system. Always issue commands in the language of spelling when entering the destination. emphasis This andpauses. also applies to excessive avoiding volume, atnormal and Say the commands and numbers smoothly 195 with voice commands, refer to refer commands, voice with The mobile phone canalso beoperated * or convertible top closed to prevent . < 25

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance

Controls

This chapter is intended to provide you with information for complete control of your vehicle. Its extensive array of features and accessories, both for driving and for your own safety, comfort and convenience, are described here. Opening and closing data in remote control,data page stored in the remote control, refer to Service Information on the required maintenance is also page Profile, Personal to refer tings are activated and executed in the vehicle, by the vehicle during unlocking, different set- Depending onwhich remotecontrol is detected tains areplaceable battery, refer topage Keys/remote controlKeys/remote andclosing Opening Press button Press Integrated key For comfort access thecharged. battery tokeep ayear twice least longer distance with each remotecontrol at charged in the ignition lock while driving. Drive a acontains batteryis remotecontrol which Each Remote control with integrated key 3 2 1 ment Adapter for spare key, in glove compart- Spare key control with integrated key Remote 28 1 to unlock the key. the unlock to * , the remote control con- , the remote 221 29 . . 38 . control locks.control thefit same The spare keyand integrated keyof the remote wallet. This key is not intended for regular use. Store the spare key in a safe place such as your Spare key available at your BMW center. key controls are with anintegrated remote replace additional new or keys, To obtain lost remote New controls the adapter before use. adapter before the the key andslide into spare compartment glove the in the holder from the adapter Remove can beswitched on. radio readiness or key spare the with started be is adapter The required so that vehiclethe can key spare for Adapter > > > key fits the integrated The locks: following Luggage compartment lid, refer to page referlid, to compartment Luggage topage door, refer Driver's Hotel function, refer to page to refer function, Hotel 32 33 34 > stored for a ofmaximum four remote controls. time you drove it. The individual settings are last the the since vehicle has used and settings another person with his/her own remote control even if settings set toyour personal own you find that will your BMW always means This stored for it are called up and carried out. isremote control detected andthe settings the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding When anything. to do having you without use in currently control remote the for stored are tings set- these of most that ensures Profile Personal individually according toyour preferences. You canset anumber functions of ofyourBMW concept The Personal Profile > > > specified pages. onthe are provided settings onthe Details Personal Profile settings > > > > > Displays ControlDisplay: on refer to page Programming buttons onsteering wheel, page locking oftheAutomatic vehicle, to refer when unlocking vehicle, refer topage Behavior of the central locking system Date format, refer topage refer Date format, to page Co the of Brightness to page Language onthe Control Display, refer topage refer sure, route/distances, temperature and pres- Units of measure for consumption, 12h/24h clock mode, refer topage mode, clock 12h/24h 33 83 84 55 84 ntrol Display, refer 83 30 83 > > > > > > > also called upduring unlocking: are following for the settings recent most The > > > > Head-Up Display ing, refer topage > PDC Park Distance Control Phone: adjusting volume, refer topage page Radio: display of stored stations, refer to refer topage settings, andtone sources: Audio volume wheel position, refer topage Driver's seat, exterior-mirror and steering- page buttons: selecting functions, refer stored to Programmable memory/direct selection destination guidance, refer topage Navigation system Navigation to page temperature in the upper bodyregion, refer air distribution, temperature, lated air mode, automatic recirculated air control/recircu- gram and intensity, cooling function, and Automatic climate control: for pro- AUTO to page BMW Night Vision topage refer display, of ness > > > > Lighting settings: High-beam assistant High-beam page Daytime running lamps page to lighting, refer Pathway Welcome lamps, refer to page to refer lamps, Welcome page refer turnto signal activation, Triple 162 44 109 100 103 64 159 * 86 * : selection and bright- and selection : * : display settings, refer refer settings, : display : voice instructions for for instructions voice : 29 * , refer , refer to page * * , refer to , refer to : optical warn- 49 97 102 103 132 190 104

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Opening and closing alarm system alarm You canfind more detailed information onthe armed at the same time. lamps dles. The interior lamps and the courtesy unlocked using the buttons lock or han- door being from doors the Itprevents time. same the These actions operate the anti-theft system at switched on. also are lamps interior and flashers warning ard haz- The automatically. unlocks system locking ofaserious accident, centralIn the the event page front center console are not locked, refer to remote control. Thealarm system The fuel filler door > > > > lowing: the all fol- of unlocks or locks either system The tion whenever the driver's door is closed. The central locking system is ready for opera- concept The Central locking system Via Via the central locking Operating from inside > > > Operating from outside Fuel filler door lid compartment Luggage in front the center console Compartment Doors with comfort access via the lock door control thevia remote 32 * are also switched on and off with the the offwith onand switched are also . 30

on page

and the compartment in and the the compartment button, refer topage 35 * . via door the handles

is armed/dis- 32 . then be opened from the outside. when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can control the along remote take inside. Always the iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for in use. currently control remote the for stored is setting You can set how the vehicle is unlocked. The button. the Press Unlocking control remote Using Opening and closing: 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. > > Select amenuitem: troller. Select "Unlock button" and press thecontroller. Select"Central locking"press and the con- press the controller. and selected is locks" "Door until controller toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe troller. con- the press and Tires" / "Vehicle Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press parked vehicle can lock thedoors from in a left unattended animals or Persons Press the button once to unlock only tounlock buttononce the driver's door and the fuel filler door. Press the "Driver's door only" tounlock buttononce the entire vehicle. Press the doors" "All inciple refer topage * < 16 . > 9. To switch off alarm: press any button. any alarm: press To switch off seconds. atleast buttonfor 3 the Press ger: ofdan- in case system cantrigger alarm You the mode* Panic button. vehicle in parking garages etc. can thisYou use also function your tolocate the Press With vehicle locked: lamps interior on Switching edge. inside is not possible without special knowl- button. the Press Locking doors > button: andholdPress the Comfortmode opening the operation. the is one buttonstops Releasing injured. the ible top are opened. Convertible: convert- windows and the the back. slides Press the controller. sunroof Coupe: the windows are opened, the glass < persons are inside, as unlocking from the the from unlocking as inside, are persons outside if the vehicle the notlock from Do entire vehicle. entire Press tounlock buttontwice the the opening process tobesure thatno the during top convertible the Watch * is raised and the sliding visor < 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. signals. confirmation the deactivate or activate can You Confirmation signals sufficient clearance. ment lid pivots back and up.Makesure there is Coupe: during opening, the luggage compart- unlocked. or locked previously was it whether of less second. The luggage compartmentlid opens, regard- approx. buttonfor 1 the Press Opening luggage compartment lid using a key. unlock and lockthe vehicle via the door lock to operate due to interference of this kind, local radio waves. Should the remote control fail The remote control may malfunction due to Malfunction Press the controller. Select the desired signal. troller. con- the press and "Confirmation" Select press the controller. and selected is locks" "Door until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. con- the press and / Tires" "Vehicle Select controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. Pressthe controller the open to menu. start the Open ment lid is also locked again after closing. after again locked also is lid ment compart- luggage locked previously A The is signal activated. < 31

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Opening and closing refer topage drive; thisextended will the recharge battery, discharged. Usethis remote control during an control, the using thenremote battery is the If it is nolonger possible tolockthe vehicle edge. inside is not possible without special knowl- user's authority to operate this equipment. > > conditions: is tothe Operation Rules. subject following two This device complies with part15oftheFCC statement: Compliance LX8CAS2 LX8CAS LX8766E LX8766S ID: FCC erned bythe following: Commission regulations. Operation is gov- part ofthe 15 FCC/Federal Communication andreceiver units with comply transmitter The ownersFor US only Usinglock door cause undesired operation. received, including interference that may this device acceptmust any interference ence, and This device maycause not harmful interfer- < persons are inside, as unlocking from from asunlocking the are inside, persons if lock vehicle outside the not the Do from changes tothese devices could voidthe or modifications unauthorized Any 28 32 . < Releasing the key stops the operation. convertible top tobe sure thatno is one injured. locking. or unlocking andhold theTurn in the key for positions vertible. Con- the in top the and windows the operate Manual operation dows andthe glass sunroof You can use the door lock to operate the win- Convenient operation 2. 1. When unlocking iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for Automatic locking remains unlocked. filler fuel The door system. anti-theft the vate acti- not lid, butdoes compartment luggage the This button serves to unlock or lock doors and inside Opening and closing: from door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door. akey all turn right the tothe way leftor in the can you malfunction, electrical an of event the In 2. 1. senger door and luggage compartment lid. thekey unlocks second pas- turn theA of door and the fuel filler door. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's rs h otolrt pnte menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press and also on the opening process of the ofthe process opening the on also and Keep a close eye on the closing process inciple refer topage * in the Coupe or to in the < 16 . rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 8. 6. 5. 4. 3. > > Locking > > Unlocking and opening 7. Press the controller. troller. Select "Central locking" and press the con- press the controller. and selected is locks" "Door until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. con- the press and / Tires" "Vehicle Select controller. the andpress Select "Settings" oprevent youfrom being locked out, the To the down button press lock of a door. or simultaneously, of the doors centralUse the locking both button tolock it. opens one first pull unlocks the andthe door, second pull the door handle for each door twice: the or armrest the handledoor above thethen pull and tem with the button the for central locking sys- Either unlock time atthe bothdoors same > > Select a menu item: vehicle as soon as you start todrive. start asyou assoon vehicle The central locking system locks the driving" after "Lock opened. after time if ashort has no door been The central locking system locks again door notopened" "Relock if The setting is selected. is setting The tem. the themdisconnects from central locking sys- in the center console front and compartment lid andthe compartment the locks luggage locking or unlocking of the vehicle. The system subsequent after activated function is hotel The then remove: and the oftravel in direction until key points the slot Turn key right,the tothe toillustration,refer sole. con- center in front the compartment to the and compartment luggage the to access prevents key, refer topage the thecontrol integrated remote without over hand you If system. locking central the from lidthem separatelypartment disconnects and the front center console and the luggage com- in hotel theThe function locks compartment Hotel function the left, before reactivating the hotel function. hotel the reactivating before left, the right until stop. reaches the it the to way the all key the turn malfunction, trical the front centerconsole the ineventof elec- an In order to manually unlock the in compartment Unlocking manually then be opened from the outside. leaving the that thewhen vehicle so vehicle can control remote the along take inside. Always the the lock button. lock the open driver's door cannot belocked using the home position, i.e. backto all home way the the to lock the return manual, If unlocking was parked vehicle can lock the doors from a in unattended left animals or Persons 28 , e.g. this atahotel, then 33 < <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Opening and closing there is sufficient clearance. result. automatically. The closing process will then be carried out To close the doors, merely push them gently. Automatic softclosing* Doors opens. second: the luggage compartmentlid 1 approx. remote controlbutton onthe for press the Press the upper half of the BMWemblem or Opening from outside section. refer above to the activated, isthat it notlocked the or functionhotel is not The luggage compartment lid opens, provided button: the Press Opening from inside Luggage compartment lid ment lid pivots back and up. Make sure During opening, theluggage compart- doors is clear; otherwise injuries may the of path closing the that sure Make < 34 < down. luggage compartment lid makeit easier to pull onthe handleThe recesses interior trim ofthe wise, injuries may result. luggage compartment lid opens. stop: the thethe right upto key the toward Turn page under the BMWemblem. All keys, refer to located is lock lid compartment luggage The Unlocking manually Closing refer topage offthe alarm, switch If the alarm has been triggered accidentally, hand. shouldthis, you alarm deactivate before- the is armed, thealarm will betriggered. prevent To to page to lid refer be cannot compartment opened, gage 28 luggage compartment lid is clear; other- the of path closing the that sure Make compartment lid alarm system while the compartment If you use lock the the toopen luggage completely open or closed, then the lug- not is top convertible the if Convertible: 43 , fit the luggage compartment lid lock. , fit luggage compartment the . < < 35 . <

Also refer to Securing cargo, page cargo, Securing to refer Also position. Emergency release Emergency in in raisedthe position. this procedure in reverse order. Before opening the convertible top, carry out position. raised the into floor convertible topcompartment the This moves in theward direction toarrow. of travel, refer To doso, unfold the handle and press itdown- capacity: compartment the increase luggage theWith convertible you topclosed, can compartment capacity Convertible: increasing luggage gage nets of theluggage compartment for securing lug- There are four lashing eyes on the inner corners Luggage compartment luggage compartmentlid is unlocked. The Pull the in lever compartment. the luggage the convertible top compartment floor is is floor convertible topcompartment the The convertible top cannot be opened if * or securing straps tofix luggage in < 128 . > > > > system: alarm the Unauthorized operations are brieflysignaled by > > > > The vehicle alarm system responds: concept The Alarm system > Switching off alarm is once again locked and monitored. it lid the is closed,When luggage compartment control,button ofthe refer remote to page even with the system armed, by using the lid, can You luggage the compartment open time. same the at ordisarmed armed is system alarm the lock, door the at or control remote the lockorWhen you unlock the vehicle, either with Armingdisarming and alarm system by flashing the high beams ignition lock. ignition the into way the all control remote the insert by switching on switching by by alarm triggering anacoustic voltage To interruptions in battery vehicle or the wheels tow the to steal attempts someone if tilt vehicle's the in changes To interior motion sensor, refer refer to page sensor, motion interior To movements in the vehicle interior: luggage compartment lid the the ofadoor, hood,or To the opening refer topage theUnlock vehicle using the control,remote 30

, or the hazard warning flashers 35 36 31 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Opening and closing including interior the motion sensor, is armed system, alarm the that means This cushions. interior up the height to the Monitors seat of the Convertible: bemust completely closed. Indicator lamp displays tion properly, the windows and glass andglass sunroof properly, windows the tion tofunc- forIn order interior motion the sensor Coupe: Interior sensor motion the vehicle. tow the or wheels tosteal attempts if someone for example, reacts, system alarm inclination the Monitors ofthe vehicle. The Tilt alarm sensor > > > > tem was armed. been detected in the period since the sys- has entry anattempted 5minutes: approx. ignition lock, however for a maximum of the control is until into theinserted remote indicator The after flashes unlockinglamp the period since the system was armed. in detected been have intrusions attempted goes out:nomanipulation or lamp theAfter vehicle is unlocked, the indicator sensor is notactivated. motion interior the However, seconds. 10 lamp flashes continuously after approx. itor the remaining areas, and the indicator the alerted area,thesystem begins mon- to close not do you if Even closed. properly not doors, hood orluggage compartment lid are the locking: after flashes indicator The lamp is armed. tem view mirror flashes continuously: the sys- rear- interior the below lamp indicator The 36 *

the vehicle is unlocked and locked again. offuntil are switched interior sensor the motion flashes continuously. Thetilt alarm sensor and control remote buttononthe The indicator lamp lights upbriefly and then the locked. is vehicle soonas as again the Press interior motion sensor Switching offtiltalarm sensor and > > > situations: following prevents unintentionalalarms, in the e.g. This may beswitched off at the time.same sensor motion interior and sensor tilt alarm The Avoiding unintentional alarms > Functional requirement > > > > tions: func- following the supports access Comfort interior. the control inremote the vicinityimmediate in or associated the detects automatically vehicle The pocket. jacket your in e.g. you, with control hand. your It is sufficient tocarry the remote control in remote the hold havingwithout to cle Comfort access allows youtoaccess your vehi- Comfort access* refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms. alarms, false trigger can leaves, e.g. objects, even if the convertible top is open. Falling When animals are to remain in the vehicle in are toremain the animals When onatrailer or sea by transporting oncar-carryingWhen trains, garages two-level In side the vehicle. remote controlthe are you carrying is out- onlycan belockedif thevehicledetectsthat The vehicleorthe luggage compartment lid Starting engine rately Opening luggage compartmentlid sepa- Coupe with closing Comfort Unlocking/locking vehicle sary. cle. Please repeat opening or closing if neces- aremotewhether control is located in vehi-the checking is theor convertiblesystem top,the below. described are access The special features whenusing comfort page onopening andclosing, startingon tion the informa- with yourself familiarize please so, remote control. buttonsonthe the doing Before withously the by or access comfort pressing You can control the functions mentioned previ- control Comparison with ordinary remote > > > > Locking do nottouchthe arrow surfaces, fully, toarrow handle refer adoor Grasp Unlocking on o hscorresponds topressing the doing This so. button. the vehicle. detects that the remote control is located in The engine can only bestarted ifthe vehicle 2 seconds.possible until after approx. not is cycle locking and unlocking next The not grasp the door handle. of your hand for a highlighted surface, arrow touchthe door, front On the passenger second, but do not grasp the door handle. 1 surface, arrow On driver's the touchthedoor, highlighted < 28 or closing the windows, the glass sunroof sunroof the closing glass windows, or the Should a short delay occur when opening . 2 , with a finger for for afinger , with approx. po.1second, butdo 1 pprox. 3 , with the back 2 or 3 when when 1 , but process immediately. process the the handleclosing door stops hand from areing visor closed. start immediately. top operation and convertible window Convertible: the surface, arrow Hold a finger orthe backofyour handagainst Coupe: comfort closing on the radio readiness, refer to page switch you button, Start/Stop the pressing By Switching on radio readiness asignal and flash ing flashers warn- hazard The again. opens lid compartment ment lid beenhas closed, then the luggage the locked vehicle after the luggage compart- button. the pressing corresponds to This Press the upper half of the emblem. BMW separately Opening luggage compartment lid control is located in interior the ofthe vehicle. convertible aremote the top,when stopped can be opened and closed, and with the vehicle From radio readiness switched on, the windows The windows, the glass sunroof glass the windows, The so. doing while handle door tery. switched off before locking to save the bat- but- ton. This corresponds to pressing the < sure that no sure is injured. one the Removing Watch during the closing process to be or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine will When doing so, do depress not the brake luggage compartment is detected inside luggage compartment the in left accidentally control remote a If electronic systems/consumers are all ignition thatthe sure and make Please < 2 or or < 3 , but do notgrasp the 37 * sounds. * and the slid- 58 < .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Opening and closing after it is switched off. seconds the approx. 10 within engine restart to possible only is it detected, is control remote no as long As Display. Control the on appears In amessage addition, up. lights lamp warning leaving the vehicle with the engine running, a If you remote controlthe take with when you topage lock,tion refer of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the igni- if istion control aremote in located the interior the canstart switchYou engine or onthe igni- Starting engine touch the surfaces, arrow simultaneouslynot doorandgrasp the handle unlockingWhen or locking/comfort closing do ignition lock. afterengine this, insert the controlremote in the control with remote akey. the or To start the close or open vehicle the with the on buttons then occurs, this If waves. radio local to due The comfort access function may malfunction Malfunction The vehicle can roll. 4. 3. 2. 1. transmission vehicles equipped with automatic in wash car a into driving Before mission position P,refer topage The engine can only be switched off in trans- with sportautomatictransmission equipped when offengine Switching the ignitionthe lock. inserted in be control must N,the tion remote posi- transmission in engine offthe switch To may limit the limit may function. Switch off the engine. N. Engage transmission position Depress brake pedal. control intoInsert lock. ignition remote 38 58 2 . or or 3 . Otherwise, you 59 . selves. example, operate the windows and injure them- leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for along take remote controlAlways the when you your field of vision until they are shut. 4. 3. 2. 1. Display. Control the in appear will message If the battery control remote of a isthe dead, Replacing battery > closing opening, Coupe: Windows Press cover closed. upward. batteryInsert with positive new facingside cover.Remove topage trol, refer integratedRemove keyfrom remote con- as you hold down the switch. The window continues toopenforas long point: resistance to switch Press closing the windows and keep them in To prevent injuries, exercise care when tion pointtion toyour center. or BMW battery toarecycling used Return collec- < 28 . < tightly at higher speeds. closeneously;windows otherwise, cannot the simulta- all four first windows or windows fort access, also refer topage refer also access, fort com- operation with on window information For closing opening, Convertible: by pulling the switch. You canclose thewindows inthe same manner > be closedbe automatically. by pulling theswitch. Therearwindows cannot You canclose thewindows inthe same manner > > Individually ment. the switch again stops the opening move- The window opens automatically. Pressing point: Press the switch beyond the resistance ment. the switch again stops the opening move- The window opens automatically. Pressing point: Press the switch beyond the resistance as you hold down theswitch. The window continues toopenfor longas point: toresistance switch Press cle is being driven, always close the rear To close the side windows while the vehi- < 37 . function. The LEDs goout. LEDs function. The Briefly press button 1. Together 1. Rear window 2. 2. Briefly press button The LEDs in button in LEDs The Briefly press button The LEDs in button in LEDs The > > switch Press seconds. 10 approx. for > switch Press seconds. 10 approx. for movement. ing the switch again stops the opening Press- automatically. open windows All point: Press the switch beyond the resistance manner by pulling the switch. You can close the windows in the same the switch. you long press as as to open continue All windows, including the rear window, point: resistance tothe Down as long as you hold down the switch. The rear window continues to open for point: resistance tothe Down 2 2 : : 1 again to deactivate the todeactivate again the 1 1 1 1 and switch and and switch and : : 39 2 2 light up light up

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Opening and closing comfort access,comfort refer topage with closing oncomfort information for Coupe: control, refer to page atthe mode lock tion door with or the remote opera- convenient the using on information For vertible top. goout. LEDs function. The Briefly press button erwise injuries can occur. and thedows rear window during closing, oth- tion system. Therefore, watch the rear side win- window are notequipped with apinch protec- the andrear windows Convertible: rear side protection system will be impaired. the windows, otherwise ofthe pinchmovement of in the range accessories any notinstall Do closing. continuewould window the and objects, thin as such ofobstructions, kinds certain detect might fail to system it, safety asthe closing and the window reopens slightly. closing closes, the is interrupted action window specific value a as If the closingforce exceeds a Pinch protection system neither of the doors has been opened. as aslong minute, approx. 1 off for switched control the removed or remote ignition with canstill the the You windows operate ignition off switching After > matically when you open or close the con- The rear window opens and closes auto- inspect the window's travel pathprior travel the window's to inspect Despite the pinch protection system, opening movement. the stops again switch the Pressing automatically. opens window rear The point: resistance the beyond switch the Press same manner by pulling theswitch. You can close the rear window in the < 40 1 31 todeactivate again the or < 32 37 . . selves. example, operate the roof and injure them- leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for along take remote controlAlways the when you field untilyour ofvision it is shut. tional whenever the ignition is switched on. The glass sunroof and sliding visor are opera- raise function* Glass sunroof, electric with Coupe: 2. 1. follows:ceed as ice the on windowprevents closing, normal pro- example, for if, or outside from of danger In case system Closing without pinch protection > Raising and closingsunroof glass tection system. window closesThe without the pinch pro- approx. 4seconds. within hold and again point resistance the beyond switch the Pull closing force exceeds certaina value. the if slightly opens window the and limited and hold. The pinch protection system is point resistance the beyond switch the Pull moves completelymoves back. The sunroof opens and the sliding visor the pointtance rear: toward resis- the beyond twice switch the press or cm in/5 2 back approx. moves The sunroof opens and the sliding visor switch: the press Briefly closingglassit thein sunroof keep and To prevent injuries, exercise care when < control, refer to page mode tion lockat door withthe or the remote For information onusing the convenient opera- > > visor sliding closing and Opening > system. The roof closes without the pinch protection point hold. and the resistance beyond forward In caseof danger from outside,slide the switch system Closing withoutprotection pinch tinue closing. very thin sunroof would andthe objects, con- to detectcertain kinds of obstructions, such as might feature toclosing it,prior fail safety as the slightly. again opens visor closing is interrupted action sliding the and cm, closing 8in/20 the within the approx. last when resistance encounters visor sliding the If glass sunroofopens. theinterrupted and is closing action closing,the when resistance encounters sunroof If the glass system protection Pinch topage refer access, with comfort closing comfort on information for tion to stop the movement. the stop to tion again direc- in any the switch press Briefly The sliding visormovesautomatically. point in the desired direction: resistance the beyond switch the Push switch. the hold you as long as for move to continues visor sliding The the desireddirection: in point resistance the upto switch Push the The sunroof and sliding visor close. front: the point toward resistance the beyond twice To close, briefly press the switch or push it should inspect the sunroof's travel range range travel sunroof's the inspect should you system, protection pinch the Despite < 37 31 . or 32 . 1. Glass sunroof manually. visor sliding the and sunroof glass the move of electricalIn the event an malfunction,you can Moving manually* have the sunroof initialized at your BMWcenter. system initialized. Should this occur, please glass sunroof not may move.have Thenthe aninterruption After the thein power supply power supply Following interruptionselectrical in 3. 2. headliner at the arrow atthe front, headliner lift so, from Todo window. away gently headlineron coverfrontRemove rear in of sunroof in thedesired direction. Allen wrench glass Use the the to move vided. arrows to page screwdriver from the on-board tool kit, refer refer topage Insert Allen wrench from onboard tool kit, 2 223 and pull firmly downward. firmly pull and . Grasp behind the cover, 223 , into the opening pro- opening the , into 41 1 , using the , using the

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Opening and closing 1. Sliding visor > > your Convertible:pleasure from the for afew maximum tips getting are Here venient operation. secure weather protectionwith simple con- and fully The convertibleautomatic topcombines Convertible: top 2. 3. kit, refer to page to refer kit, tool onboard the from screwdriver the using Fold the cover downward, if necessary convertible top. to the luggage systems rack notattach Do ment. valuables in the locked luggage compart- the convertible top is closed, only keep protection from theft. Nonetheless, evenif of amount certain a provides also it damage, compartment from unforeseen weather vertible topnotonly protects the passenger when the vehicle is parked. Theclosed con- It is advisable to close the convertible top kit tool theonboard into opening provided. Insert Allen wrenchthe supplied with the visor in the desired direction. theUse Allen wrench to move the sliding 42 223 . > > > Prior toopeningand closing occur. so that a partial invacuum the vehicle does not matic climate control to increase the air volume the can make convertible the topflap. auto- Use button. To do so, press and hold the corresponding km/h: 30 mph/ initiated operation upto a speed of 20 drive, e.g. at atraffic light, can you continue the +14 top top unless vehicle the is stationary. donot the reasons, move convertible safety For ible top. travelconvert-thepath from the of dren away ing the opening and closing action. Keep chil- in notplace Do hands the dur- topmechanism closingor can or action todamage injury. lead withoutDriving having opening the completed over protection system is raised. the move convertible roll-Never topwhen the injury. objects could fall off and lead todamage or if otherwise, top these the tobe were operated, any convertible notplace objects the on Do top; otherwise, damage from moisture can occur. compartmentforlonger one than day whenwet; Do not leave the convertible top in its storage lid is closed. thatthe sure Make luggage compartment convertiblethe topcannotbe opened. page to refer down, folded is floor ment in luggage compartment the thattheEnsure convertible topcompart- fully. them with comply and carefully above precautions the safety Read 7 speeds in the passenger compartment Partial higheroccur at thatvacuums the vehicle at a stop and to vehicle start the then and atastop with movement initiated top have you If convertible temperatures at top below In order to avoid damage, do not movethe < /–10 < 6 . 35 , as otherwise otherwise , as < not beopened. closed, then the luggage compartment lid can- If the convertible or topis notcompletely open again. the travelgoes then upwardout, windows If you buttonafter LED hold the the down completely. lowered move downward slightly and the rear window is 3 2 1 top. mightthese inhibit closing of convertiblethe eign objects from the windshield frame, as Before closing the convertible top, remove for- when the engine is running if possible. vehicle stationary: From radio readiness, radio readiness, From topage refer refer topage also access, ontopoperation information with comfort For closing and Opening > > sound: signal may anacoustic and Display LED, a message is displayed on the Control In situations, following additionthe tothein LED Opening LED Closing not yet finished. button, the closing opening or has action If the LED flashes redwhen you release the closingopening or action is finished. lights upgreen. It the soon goes as outas During convertibleoperation, top the LED < vertible top is pressed, the side windows windows side the pressed, is top vertible theWhen operating buttonfor the con- battery, only move convertiblebattery,the only top move To avoid putting excessive strain on the < 37 . 58 , with the , with 2

Improper handling can lead todamage. being driven. function and would open while the vehicle is not belocked in the event of an electrical mal- ually. Theconvertible top compartment lid can- 3. opened. be lid cannot partment mechanism can be damaged. top the otherwise, succession; in times several not Do interrupt and continue the closing action position. toastable moves slowly that position for approx a longer period, the convertible top remains in is interrupted action for opening closing or If the button. ate desiredappropri-the pressing direction the by released. Thesequence can be continued in interrupted if buttonfor the topoperation is The automatic sequence of movements is Interruption 2. 1. Before closing Closing manually Refer topages controland via doorlock operation remote Convenient with > compartment lid. compartment firmly. This unlocks the convertible top with the thenpartment pullscrewdriver and Pry out in two the thebuttons luggage com- from the onboard tool kit, refer to page to refer kit, tool onboard the from Take the Allen wrench and the screwdriver Open luggage compartment lid. moved. occurred. The convertible top cannot be has malfunction a or position raised the in is partment floorluggage inthe compartment pressed, either the convertible top com- If lights LED the up red buttonis when the absolutely necessary; never open it man- close convertibleOnly the top manually if open or closed, then the luggage com- If the convertible topis notcompletely opened or closed presents a danger. A convertible topwhich is notcompletely 31 and 32 . 15 minutes before it . 15minutes . 43 < < < 223 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Opening and closing 4. 5. 1. Opening rear windowmanually 2. cannot beopened. Close luggage compartment lid. the switch, it must be lowered manually. lowered be must it switch, the If the rear opened window cannot be using rear window. the and side the windows open Completely ments, as shown in the illustration. the in shown as ments, ele- locking tothe possible close as as restraints. doTo so, place the screwdriver Pry cover outthe the between rear head window is completelywindow is open. indicatedtion the by arrow until rear the theinto opening andturn firmly in direc-the Insert the Allen wrench as far as possible tion, the luggage compartment lid the tion, luggage compartment manual convertible opera- During top 44 < 3. 2. 1. the convertible topcan occur. the doors open, otherwise injury and damage to Closing open, arrow open, lid the convertiblekeep topcompartment neously and pivot forward. doing When so, topout convertible ofthe sides simulta- the pull person, Together with other two the arrow frame, side right the topwithGrasp handsattheboth left and lid compartment openings and raise the convertible top side panel forward.Reach into the resulting Push the cover assistance of a second person and with with and person ofasecond assistance the with steps work the following Perform otherwise the top may be damaged. Only lift outthe top the by side frame, 4 , e.g. with your , e.g. your shoulder. with 1 on the left andright of the 2 as far as will as as it far go. 3 . < < 4. 7. 6. 5. 10. 9. 8. can occur. been swung forward, otherwise damage top compartment lid, arrow top compartment possible, arrow as far as ends convertible top two the Raise provided. Insert Allen the the into wrench opening driver if necessary. center ofthe topframe; front use ascrew- the outthe From in interior, take the cover lid. topcompartment ible ontothe down Fold convert- topends the manually in the same way asabove. way same in the manually If necessary, close the rear window again partment lid andclose tightly with tension. cally pressed ontothe topcom- convertible The rear convertible top ends are automati- windshield frame. tothe locked is frame top convertible front until the arrow Turn Allen the wrench thein direction of the sides. two the on possible as simultaneously as ward, convertible topdown- ofthe front frame the pull bothpersons From outside, the raising top ends, untilraising topends, tophas the notcarry out Do nextthe operation, < 5 , and close the convertible 6 . 4. 3. 2. 1. Before installing protective sleeve. instructions for use are also provided on the Short in sleeve luggagethe compartment. The wind deflector is stowed in a protective pleasant driving even athigher speeds. thus enabling convertible the topis open, when toaminimum compartment passenger the The wind deflector keeps the air movement in Wind deflector* Unfold theUnfold rear mounts Push the securing pin securing the Push arrow until the locking device engages, refer to thePress upper and section lower together arrows refer it to open, fold and tive sleeve Remove the wind deflector from the protec- 2 1 . . 3 45 out until engages. out it 4 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Opening and closing 1. Installing The same as installing, but in reverse order. Removing aged. tion. Otherwise, the wind deflector will bedam- theif backtothe seat moved end is tobe posi- 2. 3. 4. Insert the securing pin pin securing the Insert side of the vehicle. the of side into opening onthe appropriate tor the right Guidethe rear mounts place. the appropriate opening until it snaps into pin securing the Push cles provided. tor. Fold up the upper half < the front seat backrests too far backward toofar backrests front the seat incline not do fitted: deflector wind With 46 3 4 1 2 onthe left intoside ofthe wind deflec- of the wind deflec- wind the of into the recepta- into 2. 1. Folding up Fold in the upper and lowerinthesection. upperand Fold mechanism. locking the release and back way the all wind deflector on the left side of the vehicle Push thehandle ofthe securing pin onthe on airbags, refer to page to refer airbags, on information additional and locations airbag For porary. tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem- provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi- stances. The ignition and inflation noise may be fully excluded, depending onthe circum- ries resulting from contact with airbags cannot inju- instructions, the all to adhere you if Even are triggered. if occur airbags can the injuries otherwise, airbags; head or side on the rest not their head thatoccupantsdo sure Make knee and front airbags are triggered. panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the and does notrest feet or legs on the instrument sitting is thatthe correctly passenger sure front Make area. astorage as side passenger front the ofthe airbag onthe notuse front Do cover and bags the seat occupant. No one nothingand is to come thebetween air- in the event of airbag deployment. risk the ofinjuries mize andarms hands to your tomini- positions o'clock 9o'clockthe and3 rim with hands at hold the steering wheel by its dren safely, refer safely, topage dren chil- onTransporting information additional For section. low the instructions contained in the following tofol- urge you strongly we optimal efficiency, with operate systems safety the that ensure animportant role in To accident. an plays position the seat airbags, the and restraints interaction the belts, the head safety with tribution torelaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the ideal The avital positionsitting con- canmake Sitting safely Adjusting Airbags between yourself and yourself and airbags. between the Always Alwaysmaintain adequatedistance an 94 56 . . < Safety belts refer topage belt. safety avoidreduction a inthe restraining effect of the your the across inlap readjust tension order to to periodically upward belt shoulder the pull that prevents fitting beltthe properly from and and injure wearing theabdomen. Avoid clothing the in area a frontal lap impact the hips in over body as possible. Otherwise, thebelt can slip across the lap and shoulders, as close to the the twisting,belt Wear safety snuglywithout over solid or breakable objects or bepinched. the neck, rub against sharp edges, berouted across lie not must belt safety The abdomen. hips in the lap area and notdoes press on the lap. Makesure thatthebelt lies low aroundthe apassenger's in toride children or small infants equipped with asafety belt. Your vehicle fourhas seats that are each substitute. a represent do not but they device, safety tional complementbags the safety belt anaddi-as Air- occupied seats. being worn atall ofthe are Before every drive, make sure that safety belts belt Safety Head restraints, refer to page accident. increased danger of injury in the event of an risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in an accident. reduces the restraint head correctly adjusted A Head restraints wear asingle safety belt.Never allow Never allow more than one person to is there Otherwise, level. ear at approx. is Adjust headthe restraint sothatits center < < 52 47 . 50 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Adjusting 5 4 3 2 1 will be damaged. the endposition. Otherwise, the winddeflector backwardiffar the is seat to be movedbackto page on instructions adjustment the follow please safety belts provided onpage Please follow the instructions on todamage belt in an accident. could under slide the passenger asthe injury, effective providing against protection from this precaution observe beltcan prevent the Failure rear. the toofar to backrest the toward well, side donottilt as the passenger front On accident. ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an respond with unexpected movement and the page active onthe front restraints mation head on Note before adjusting Seats Adjusting seat page to refer restraints, head Convertible: Backrest Height direction Longitudinal Inclination 47 50 do not incline the front seat backrests too too backrests seat front incline the not do withConvertible: the wind fitted,deflector tinue to provide optimized protection, tinue optimized toprovide con- systems the that safety To ensure operating the vehicle. Theseat could toadjustyourwhile seat attempt Never . . < 51 48 < < 53 and the infor- the and longitudinal direction. Pull the lever and adjust thigh supportmanually: Lumbar support* > > relaxed, upright sitting position. plementary support to help you maintain a The upper hips and spinal column receive sup- region. in additional support to the obtain lumbar backrest the contours of the also adjust can You With the sports seat theWith sports Press top or bottom ofswitch. bottom topor Press Move curvature upor down: or front of switch. rear Press Increase or decrease curvature: * , you can also adjust the adjust , youalso can the in support thigh the the seat or steering wheel. risk accidentunexpected of fromof movement 2. wheel memory Seat, mirror and steering 1. Comfort mode Requesting 1. Storing stored in the memory. ofthe is not support adjustment lumbar The rors and steering wheel. exterior for driver's settings mir- the seat, ment You can store and select three different adjustment switches or one of the memory buttons. ofthe one memory or switches ment when you briefly press one of the seat adjust- The system cancels the adjustment procedure 4. 3. 2. Briefly press the desired memory button the press Briefly memory desired 2 switch on radio readiness, refer to page or unlocking after door driver's the Open to page Switch onradio or readiness refer ignition, Press the desired memory the Press button memory desired button: The in button the LED lights up. the Press steering-wheel positions. desired mirror exterior Adjust the and seat, The LED goes out. or ory while the vehicleis moving. There is a the mem- from notrequest aposition Do 3 . 58 . < 1 , 2 or 58 1 3 , : .

4. 3. 2. 1. iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage ofthebuttons. one memory or switches ment when you briefly press one of the seat adjust- The system cancels the adjustment procedure movement of the seat. could beinjured ordamaged by a rearward behind objects the persons or so, any seat seat isand unobstructed. empty fail If youto do > > is requested: positionthe when canchoose You currently the infor key use. remote rearview mirrors,steering and are wheelstored The last positions of the driver's seat, external Activating with remote control 2. 1. Safety feature If the button was pressed pressed button inadvertently: was goes out. button LED the the press again; If the refer to page the steeringadjustment wheel inanydirection, is interrupted if you briefly press the switch for The adjusting procedure for the steering wheel troller. con- the press and / Tires" "Vehicle Select controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. Pressthe controller the open to menu. start the Open Request when opening driver's door Request when unlocking vehicle the Press button memory desired referon or topage off, ignition switch and door driver's the Close process has been completed. been has process until and maintain pressure the adjustment sure that sure behind footwell thethe driver's When using this feature, always make 54 . < 58 49 . 1 , 2 or 16 3 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Adjusting 5. 8. 7. 6. Select "Deactivated" and press the controller. request: cancel theTo 9. cannot function. protective its cannot provide restraint head the asotherwise passengers, thestall restraints before transporting head willone sitting be on the in seat question. Rein- no if restraints head the remove Only accident. increased danger injuryof in the event of an risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in an accident. reduces the restraint head correctly adjusted A Front headrestraints press the controller. and selected is locks" "Door until controller fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe opened". Select "After unlocking" or"After door troller. con- and the pos." press seat "Last Select troller. Select"Central locking"press and the con- Press the controller. is approx.is ear at level. Otherwise,there is center so that its head the restraint Adjust 50 < and installed. not function properly. will equipment Otherwise, thissonnel. safety procedures with correspondingly trained per- workshop that works according to BMWrepair this work carried outby a center or aBMW have Only collision. rear-end a in triggered are after they reset head restraints the active Have collision. reducing potential in the event of a rear-end injury- ofits advantage totake is it not possible function and protective its perform will restraint wise, there is assuranc no functioning ofthe head active Other- restraint. tothedistance head. active the head the severity, reduces restraint In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient Active front head restraints > > Adjusting height Coupe ward. To lower: slide the head restraint down- To raise: pull the head restraint upward. button, refer to arrow toarrow button, refer the position, press the lowest To reach to have the front head restraints removed removed the restraints have head front to Please contact a BMW center if you wish covers that could impede the proper Do not use seat covers or head restraint < < e thatthe active head 1 . < restraint. head the of function properthe impair back of the headback ofthe Front adjustingseats: distance to the > headback ofthe Front adjustingseats: distance to the theswitchMove upor down. Adjusting height Convertible > > Forward: pull up. rest cushion toward the rear. pushtheBack: buttonandslide the head- Forward: pull up. headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can behind the notplace objects Do any < the seat. the unexpectedmovementaccident an of due to Coupe: releasing backrest Entering rear 1. easier to get in back. The belt system integrated in the seat makes it Convertible: releasing backrest the safety belt more conveniently. fasten to you enables This it. onto hooked be The lever is designedso that the safety belt can ward. Pull the lever upward and fold the backrest for- restraint. head the of function properthe impair > Pull lever lever Pull ward. rest cushion toward the rear. pushtheBack: the buttonandslide headback, otherwise there is the danger of todrive, starting backrests Before fold headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can behind the notplaceobjects Do any < < 1 up and fold the backrest for- backrest fold and the up 51

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Adjusting shown on the Control Display.Control the on shown 4. 3. 2. need to use lever bly locks into place. To fold it back, you do not parked on a hill. Press the backrest until it audi- ple, when you get into the vehicle while it is substitute. tional device, buttheysafety donotrepresent a complementbags the safety belt as anaddi- are being worn atall of the occupied seats. Air- Before every drive, make sure that safety belts page on instructions adjustment the follow please Safety belts release button release moved back intoits previous position. If you button hold and Press the backrest back and lockit in place. enteredhave theAfter passengers rear, fold moved intothe desired position. button hold and Press in its current position. 47 is folded forward. This is useful, for exam- for is This useful, forward. folded is You can lockthe backrest inplace whenit tinue to provide optimized protection, tinue optimized toprovide con- systems the that safety To ensure locked. At the same time,a message is backrest Lights upwhen the is not backrestLock warning lamp: . < 52 1 3 to release it. release to before this, the seat stops before stops the seat this, 3 2 until the seat has until seat the has until seat the < seat. if vated placed onthe objects are passenger acti-be km/h.Itcanalso5 mph/8 approx. above safetyThe belt reminderis operative at speeds correctly.being worn are belts safety whether check Please Display. Fastening and passenger seat* Safety beltreminder fordriver's seat refer topage adjusted, correctly is seat the correct adults the for position of buildevery if in be will point anchorage strap's shoulder The 3. 2. 1. Releasing the belt buckle. Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in Guide the belt into its reel. red the buttoninPress the belt buckle. Hold the belt firmly. tional message appears on the Control onthe appears tional message nal sounds. At the same time, an addi- sig- a and up lights lamp indicator The 48 . dent risk. mirrors; otherwise, there is an increased acci- following traffic based on what you see in the the they notestimate distance Do appear. of inObjects thereflected are closer mirror than guaranteed. correct operation of thissafety equipmentnot is appropriately trained personnel. Otherwise, according toBMWrepair procedures with works that or center aworkshop aBMW by outonly carried this work Have checked. points anchor belt the have and systems restraint child belts, belt the tensioners, safety andany the Damage to safety belts Exterior mirrors Mirrors button the Press longer. off: To switch lit. remain LEDs ontheload The battery. heating is switched off in order to reduce the The temperature is reduced and if need be, the when three LEDs are lit. button. The temperaturemaximum is supplied its control sequence each time you press the The temperature setting advances one step in Heated seats* more curveddriver'smore the than mirror. The mirror on the passenger's side is dent or in the event of damage, replace When subjected to strain due to an acci- < < glass. mirror oftheir edges outer the against pressing can adjustthe You manually by also mirrors Adjusting manually ror and steering wheel memory on page Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mir- engine is running orthe ignition is switched on. exterior mirrors are heated whenever the acertainBelow temperature, outdoor both Automatic heating button Pressing Folding exterior mirrors in and out prx 5mh4 km/h. mph/40 25 approx. into back are folded out automatically aat speed of folded-in manually in folded were Mirrors that position. correct the been have that rors car washes, narrow streets or for bringing mir- for in example, km/h. advantageous, is This 30 mph/ ofapprox. 20 outuptoaspeed and in the width of the car wash system. wash car ofthe width the erwise they could bedamaged,depending on 3 2 1 Folding mirrors in and out and in mirrors Folding curbautomatic monitor Switching otherto the mirror tothe or Adjusting mirrors in manually, or with in button or manually, mirrors fold the wash, acar through going Before 3 allows you to fold mirrors 53 * < 49 3 , oth- .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Adjusting 2. 1. Activating automatic curb monitor Tiltingpassenger-side down mirror – interior rearview mirror and the windshield. clean the theand between do not cover area trouble-freeFor operation, keepthe photocells mirror housing. onthe position rear ofthe atanoffset located while the lens, within is the mirror's other the inside rearview mirror. One is integrated This feature is controlled bytwo photocells in dimming feature automatic Interiorexterior and mirrors, position, arrow Slide switch into the passenger side mirror Deactivating ing, etc. to the vehicle – such as a curb – when park- driver to see the area immediately adjacent the allows This side. passenger's the on The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat R. position Shift into reverse selectoror move lever into position, arrow Slide switch into the driver's side mirror 54 2 . 1 . page Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory, Storing the steering-wheel position, refer to directions. The steering wheel can beadjusted in four dent as theresult ofunexpected movement. Adjusting Steering wheel the steering wheel heater is switched on. in indicator lamp The buttonlights the upwhen button. the Press wheel Steering heating* uppermost position. the steering wheel temporarily intomoves the To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle, entry/exit Easy front of the ofthe front mirror. attachstickers donot tothe windshield in Also 49 vehicle is moving. There is a risk of acci- Do not adjust the steering wheel while the . < 2. 1. 4. 3. wheel Programmable buttons* on steering iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- can You individually. the program buttons rs h otolrt pnte menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press > A list functions appears: of different the controller. Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press controller. the andpress Select "Settings" tem Voice instructions of the navigation sys- "Navigation voice instructions" * 16 . using the corresponding button. function selectedthe activate can now You 6. 5. > > for ofthe one buttons: instructions" voice "Navigation youIf programmed have wheel. the Press corresponding buttononthe steering function Operating controller. Select the buttonif the necessary andpress the controller. Select the desired function unit and press > > > > > > Press the the Press button. instruction: voice last the repeat To Press the button longer. on/off: instructions voice To switch BMW NightBMW Vision Switches "Night Vision on / off" Changes audio source "Next entertainmentsource" stored phone numbers displayed Display/hide phone book or last list of "Telephone list" Switches the Control Display on/off off" / on "Monitor the sources audio Mutes on/ off" "Mute control onpage recirculated-air Automatic toAUC refer air, outside off shutting Permanently off" / on recirculation "Air 111 * * 55 on/off

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Transporting children safely may bereduced. Otherwise, the degree of protection they offer systems. restraint ofchild use and installation page referto airbags, thefrontpassenger of deactivation onautomatic information more For even with a child restraint system. of injury to the child if the triggered,airbags are doing so. Otherwise, there is an increased risk passenger side must bedeactivated before onthe airbags side knee the and front, seat, doors. the themselves andother persons, e.g. byopening The right placefor children childrensafely Transporting systems restraint Installing child Exception for front passenger seat size and weight. systemlonger can no beusedto due their age, restraint child asasuitable assoon belt safety a wear must ofage older or years 13 Children increased danger injuryof in an accident. height of the child. Otherwise, there is an tothe and weight correspond age, which tems be transported in the rear in child restraint sys- back. the in is children for place safest the that shows research Accident in always the rear Children turer's instructionsthe for selection, manufac- system restraint child Follow passenger front the on system restraint achild it touse be Should necessary vehicle; otherwise,couldendanger they notleave Do children the unattended in with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may cm only ft/150 with a height under 5 or age of years 13 than younger Children < 56 < < < 94 . gered. trig- are airbags the if injury of risk increased an ger side are deactivated, as otherwise there is front airbags front the side on the passen- and Child seat securityChild seat seat frontpassenger On dren. LowerLATCH: Anchor and Tethers for CHil- system restraintLATCH child fixing 3. 2. 1. Unlocking safetybelt 3. 2. 1. Locking safety belt tosecure out child restraint systems. front passenger canbe locked pullingagainst belts for andthe All belt the safety safety rear pletely. Allow the belt webbing tobepulled in com- Remove the child restraint system. Open the belt buckle. locked. is belt safety The the pull tautagainst child system. restraint Allow the belt webbing tobepulled in and Pull outthe belt webbing completely. belt. Secure the child with restraint the system the front passenger seat, make sure that make seat, front the passenger on achild restraint mounting system After < aged. otherwise the could points mounting be dam- their impair function.protective to not order in systems restraint child LATCH protective action may beimpeded. the snugly the Otherwise, backrest. against and thatthe is resting child restraint system restraint fixing system. from belt region ofthethe the away child child's the pull seat, attaching LATCH Before Anchor points for mounts LATCH tether strap child restraintCoupe: with system andthein the gapbetween backrest. the seat indicated at are by located positions the arrows anchors the mounting for LATCH The points Rear seats < points to secure child restraint systems, child tosecure points systems, restraint the mounting use top tether-strap Only instructions on installation and use of Follow the system manufacturer's mounts mounts have properly clicked into place that both sure Make LATCH of lower the < < 3. 2. 1. restraint head the fold points, mounting the using Before 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 dent. child restraint system in the event of an acci- otherwise, the belt may not properly secure the onits twist upper mounting tothe way point; Placement of tether strap of tether Placement to arrows. refer with strap, atether systems child restraint points for mounting additional are There two ing point. tether the Attach tothe mount- strap hook restraint. the Guide tether over strap head the position. into the Slide restraint the head bottom Tether strap of child restraint system Backrest floor Rear window shelf/luggage compartment Mounting point hook Tether strap Head restraints Direction of travel < routed over sharp edges and does not not does and edges sharp over routed the that is not tether strap sure Make * into its raised position. raised its into 57

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Driving switched on. The ignition is switched off if it was still device. it in as far as possible to release the locking Before removingthe remote control, first press damage may result. may damage lock Inserting remote control into ignition Ignition lock Driving transmission position P is selected: interlock. selected: is P position transmission when removed be only can control remote The Sport automatic transmission lock ignition from control remote Removing page refer to cases, control into the ignition lock in exceptional remote access, only the insert comfort With Comfort access* operation. for ready are systems/consumers electronic Some on. switches readiness Radio ignitionthe lock. into control as as remote possible far Insert the ignition lock using force, as otherwise control notpull outoftheDo the remote 58 < 36 . save the battery. save not required when the engine is not running to sion. automatic equipped with sport the transmis- transmission or the brake if your vehicle is if your vehicle is equipped with the manual the or ignition readiness radio off. and on the buttonswitches Start/Stop the Pressing Start/Stop button page are displayed in the instrument cluster, refer to operation. The odometer and the trip odometer All electronic systems/consumers are ready for Ignition on > > Radio readiness is switched off: ture displayedare in the cluster. instrument for operation. Thetime and outside tempera- ready are systems/consumers electronic Some Radio readiness page refer on toLocking door handle, onthe face with comfort access ignitionthe lock when the remote control is removed from < 74 electronicsystems/consumers which are ignition offthe switch andthe Please Start/Stop buttonanddepress clutchthe isThe engine started press whenyou the . 37 < * by touching thesur- damage to the catalytic tothe damage converter. quatelyand there dangerisoverheating of a and fuel is not burned at all or is burned inade- which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the roll. handbrake, otherwise the vehicle can begin to the apply firmly and P position into mission the orning, select theidling trans- shift position, Before leaving vehicle the with the engine run- hazard. potential safety engine running, suchas a vehicle represents a Never leave an unattended vehicle with the an odorless andcolorless, buthighly toxic gas. The exhaust gases cont gases can cause unconsciousness and death. Instead, drive off at a moderate engine speed. running while the vehicle remains stationary. it leaving by up warm engine to the not allow Do 3. 2. 1. Starting engine cluster goout. ment instru- the in lamps warning and indicator All Radio readiness and ignition off access in vehicle,access in refer page to incontrol ignitionRemote or lock with comfort Manual transmission < Press the the Press button. Start/Stop position. idling Depress the clutch pedal and select the Depress brake pedal. sion or repeated starting attempts in starting attempts repeated or sion Avoid frequent starting in quick succes- the otherwise inhalation exhaust oftoxic Do notrun theengine in closed rooms, ain carbon monoxide, ain carbon 36 . < otherwise the vehicle could roll. When parking, firmly a 4. 3. 2. 1. Manual transmission Switching engine off 2. 1. vehicle,access in refer page to control ignitionRemote in or lock with comfort Sport automatictransmission* > > Pwill be engaged: Transmission position 4. 3. 2. 1. steps: following the The vehicle can roll if you proceed according to Before driving into a car wash 4. 3. 2. 1. Sport automatictransmission* tion lock, refer to page to refer lock, tion Remove the remote control from the igni- Firmly applythe handbrake. Shift first into gear reverse. or stopped. thePress buttonwith Start/Stop the vehicle the Press button. Start/Stop Depress brake pedal. ignition lock ignition if the remote control remove the you from minutes 30 after approx. automatically switch off the engine. N. position transmission Shift into Depress brake pedal. trol into ignition the lock. con- remote the insert access: comfort With page to refer lock, tion Remove the remote control from the igni- Firmly applythe handbrake. the Press button. Start/Stop vehicle stopped. position P withthe into Shift transmission remote controlyou. with When leaving the vehicle, always take the pply the handbrake, as pply the 59 58 58 . . 36 < .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Driving brake is applied. The brake lamps do not light upwhenthe hand- ifto a trafficstop the conditions are suitable. brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming Indicator lamp wheels. rear the brakes it parked; while rolling from vehicle the The handbrakeprimarily is intendedprevent to Handbrake swerve. rear wheelscauseandrear the the of vehicle to applicationan ofthehandbrake can lock upthe ton of handbrake the lever. Otherwise, too firm In press the continuously firmly. but- doing so, thewhile vehicle is in donotpull motion, it too lever. the lower and button the press upwards, slightly Pull Releasing lever automatically. in The locks position Applying ing action, occasionallying action, engage the hand- preventTo corrosionand one-sided brak- make make it necessary toapply thehandbrake If exceptional circumstances should < Indicator lamp for Canadian models. handbrake is applied. starting off.The when sounds also nal sig- a and up, lights lamp indicator The 60 < lead toengine damage. into shift or an 3rd inadvertent could4th gear ing Control. Driv- Sport, toDynamic or refer Normal grams: driving two canalso between choose You pro- a slight resistance. slight a gearshift the lever tothe left, overcoming Press Select only when the vehicle is stationary. gear Reverse transmission Manual P, R, N, D, S1 through S6, M1 through M6 Displaysin instrument cluster P R N D M/S+ – positionsTransmission page to refer Steptronic, with manually shift also can you mode, fullyautomatic the addition to In transmission* automatic Sport 61 gearshift lever toward the right, the otherwise toward lever gearshift shifting When into 5th/6th gear, press the . < > > Engaging transmission position selected gear are displayed. The transmission mode and the currently Press button Press Engaging P sary. Press button direction, beyondaresistance point if neces- desired the in lever selector the press Briefly Engaging N, D, R center position when released. tothe returns lever selector immediately The lever. selector onthe played The engaged transmission position is also dis- into R. you are ready tostart. are ready you untilbrake pedal maintainpressure the on executed: shiftlock. otherwise the willshift command notbe N; brake pedal before shifting outofPor With the vehicle stationary, depress the until the engine is running: interlock. position P the notleave Do transmission after you select a driving position, adriving select after you To prevent the vehicle from creeping P . 1 simultaneouslyorout P of < refer to page is useful, for example, in automatic car washes, controlthe Thisfunction lock. in ignition remote The vehicle can roll. example. for washes, car in N select can You N Neutral Before driving into acar page wash, to refer lock, ignition the in inserted is control andwith the comfort engaged remote access rear wheels are locked. The Select only when the vehicle is stationary. P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. R Reverse S6 is displayed in the instrument cluster. cluster. instrument the in displayed is S6 S1 through and is activated program sport The D: mission position trans- left from toward the lever selector Press M/S mode manual and program Sport resistance at increased full throttle. the Press pedal theaccelerator beyond performance. Kick-down enables you to achieve maximum Kick-down forward gears are available.All vehicle forPosition operation. normal D Drive, automatic position is switched off whenever you leave the remainsengagedN evenafter the engine you switch off the engine unless Nis as as soon automatically engaged is P 59 . < 61 59 . <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Driving lever to the tothe lever right. To resume automatic mode, press the selector current gear. the by followed cluster, instrument the in played speeds.engine Theselectedgearis briefly dis- high excessively at out carried not is shift suitable engine and vehicle speed, e.g. a down- Upshifts and downshifts are only carried out at a M6. through M1 shows ter clus- instrument gear. The shifts Steptronic the back,the is activated or mode manual and ward When the selector lever is briefly moved for- mance-oriented driving style. position is recommended for a perfor- This > > can remain on the steering wheel. allow you to shift gears quickly, as both hands paddles shift The wheel. steering the on dles canalso shift You two manually with shift pad- Shift paddles on steering wheel > > gi hnteslco ee si D. in is lever selector the when again mode the into automatic switches tem do not a accelerate for the time, certain sys- If donot you shift with shift the and paddles the manual mode. into switches system gearshift the mode, in toshift automatic gears wheel steering When you use the shift paddles on the dles. To shift down: press one of the shift pad- To shift up:pull ofthe one shift paddles. 62 Activating system > > > > > a button: pushmance-orientedthe of manner at yourfor BMWtoreactin aneven moreperfor- DynamicThe Driving Control makes it possible Dynamic Driving Control hand so that the vehicle cannot roll. Reengage andfirmlytowing apply thehandbrake before- for lock transmission the release manually Only towed. vehicle be cannot erwise the rear wheels are blocked and the oth- lock, as transmission the release manually drainedis ordisconnected,electrical oran fault, In case of a power failure, e.g. when the battery transmission lock Manually unlocking and locking clusterment goout. in LED button The the thein and instru-SPORT > > > Deactivating system displayed in the instrument cluster. is in buttonlights LED the upand The SPORT button. SPORT the Press engaged. is gear not theIn the mode, automatic 6th mode. The steering will operate in even an sportier pedalto accelerator movements. spontaneously more responds engine The are faster. Gearshifts utilized. The speed range of the engine is optimally Switch offengine Engage reverse gear buttonagain SPORT the Press 2. 1. Releasing destination. at its lock transmission thethe after vehicleparking 5. 4. 3. 6. Pull the sleeve upover the selector lever. Unclip the sleeve theof selector lever. kit, refer to page the tool from onboard Insert ascrewdriver Remove cover over the opening, refer to 5. arrow and firmly pull the trim piece upward, arrow trim-piece opening, the into Reach heard toengage,arrow Pull the towardscrewdriver the rear until it is arrow lockreleased. is transmission The opening. the in inserted 2 1 . . 223 , into opening, the 2 , and leave it leave , and 1 , edapflasher headlamp Turn signals/ page from towing and starting jump on Information 2. 1. Locking it there as long as you wish tosignal. you long wish as it as there thePress lever to resistance the and point hold Signaling briefly lamp. point. resistance the To switch off manually, only press the lever to Move the lever beyond the resistance point. Using turn signals 3 2 1 Reinstall the cover and the trim piece. again. locked is lock transmission The Pull out the screwdriver upward. Turn signals flasher Headlamp High beams < 228 lamp indicates the indicates aturn signal failure lamp of Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator . 63

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Driving rently in use. in rently settingThe is for stored the controlremote cur- 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for canactivate deactivateYou this function. or times. three flash signals thePress lever to the resistance point; the turn Triple turn signalactivation 3 2 1 Wiper system 6. press the controller. and selected is "Lighting" until controller fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe troller. con- the press and Tires" / "Vehicle Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press Activating/deactivating rain sensor Switching offwipers or brief wipe Switching on wipers controller. Select "Triple turn signal" andpress the Triple turn signal is activated. 64 inciple refer topage 16 . speed whenever the vehicle is stationary. atnormal tooperation reverts system The point. tance Briefly press twice or press beyond the resis- speed Fast wiper tent mode whenever the vehicle is stationary. The system reverts operationto in the intermit- once. Press speed wiper Normal released. when tion initial posi- toits returns automatically lever The Pull the lever upward, arrow Switchingwipers on 5 Turn the knurled wheel Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level button,arrow the Press Activating rain sensor interior rearview mirror. located on the windshield, directly in front theof is rain The sensor intensity. rain ofthe function a as automatically controlled is operation Wiper Rain sensor ton lights ton lights up. 4 Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level sensitivity sensor rain Adjusting M Night Vision camera BMW Cleaning windshield, headlamps and 5 3 . . TheLED in the but- 1 . * containers. low the instructions for use provided on the there is the danger of bodily injury. Always fol- container outofreach ofchildren. Otherwise, only in andstore closedsources original the BMW Night Vision camera* Vision Night BMW and headlamps windshield, Cleaning thePress button Deactivating rain sensor Washer fluid on. switched tion cally heated with the engine running or the igni- nozzles are automati- windshield washer Both Windshield washer nozzles Pull the lever, arrow empty, as this will damage the washer pump. washers when the washer fluid reservoir is antifreeze, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use obscured. To avoid freezing, use a washer fluid windshield. If you do so, your vision could be vals. also cleaned simultaneously at suitable inter- are Night camera BMW Vision andthe lamps head- the on, lightingswitched vehicle the With period. the abrief windshieldfor andactivates wipers the against fluid washer sprays system The ired wiperired activation. couldso do resultdamage in byundes- caused out. For this this keep it ignitionreason, away from For Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. danger that the fluid will freeze on the any Do not use the washers if there is through an automatic car wash. Failure to Failure wash. car an automatic through passing when rain sensor the Deactivate <

again, arrow again, 4 < : 3 . TheLED goes < Capacity mendations. antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom- washer a with – required –if and water with Fill voir. All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser- for neck fluid Filler washer and cause anaccident. cause and Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle surface. road loose and ice, rain, snow, as such conditions road in poor or traffic heavy in roads, stant speed, e.g.when driving on winding cient. on uphill grades if theengine output is insuffi- sufficient on a downhill grade. Speedcan drop tem brakes if the engine braking effect is not the specified the speed, Tomaintain sys- umn. using set the mountedlever onthe steering col- vehicle that the speed stores and maintains you km/h andhigher. The mph/30 20 of approx. The cruise controlisavailable for use at speeds concept The Cruise control* liters. quarts/5 US approx.Capacity 5.3 the washer fluid before filling. before fluid washer the mix ratio, mixture the to maintain In order ing conditions that do not permit acon- the notuse Do cruise control under driv- < 65 <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Driving One leverOne forallfunctions the displaythe Press the lever up or down, arrow Interrupting system as same are the Functions Pull the lever, arrow decelerating Maintaining speed, storing speed, and Press lever to resistance point, arrow speed Maintaining, storing and increasing 4 3 2 1 reduced. releaselever. the and stores your current speed as as you soon maintains The accelerator system the pedal. vehicleThe without accelerates pressure on it: hold lever and the resistance point to the Press km/h. mph/1 speed increases by roughly 1 Every time you press the lever, the vehicle's ter, see below, indicates this regulated speed. vehicle speed. Thedisplay The system maintains and stores the current color. Resuming stored speed Interrupting anddeactivating system decelerating and speed, storing speed, Maintaining Maintaining,storing increasing and speed 1 in the speedometer changes 66 2 : 1 1 ; the speed is in the speedome- 3 . 1 : > Deactivating system stored speed. vehicle theThe toandmaintains accelerates button Press storedspeed Resuming The speed stored in the memory is deleted. > freeways or other high-speed thoroughfares. speed that can accompany driving in traffic on welcome relief from the constant adjustment of advanceover the familiarcruise control andis a Active cruiserepresentscontrol technological a to slower moving vehicles ahead. setting distance aselected tomaintain varied is maintained whendriving open roadways on and is which automatically speed desired then activeWith cruise control youcan select a Active cruise control* 2 1 Displaysin instrument cluster > > > rupted: In addition, is the system automatically inter- Press the lever upor down twice, arrow Switch off the ignition offthe Switch Selected speed is displayed briefly Stored speed vated is is activated when DTC DSC or deacti- idling or Nposition the into theshift transmission automatic when you shift very slowly and when you when you brake, even with the handbrake 4 : 3 use. Carefully read and observe the information before relating pages all system to this ofthe read you that necessary is it to, accustomed be ventional cruise contro from con- differently operates and technology new is a activethiscontrol cruiseSince system collisionas a usedavoidance/warning system. Active cruise control is notandmust notbe stopped oris blocking the road. sufficient. is not put out- engine the if uphill driving when speed set however the vehicle speed can drop below the speed is also maintained ondownhill grades, will accelerate to your desired speed. This set vehicles,no moving systemthe youhas front of the in road soonas setting As selected. tance dis- the tomaintain transmission automatic necessary yourbe for vehicle the todownshift lowing driver In action. totake addition, it may afol- toalert illuminate will automatically lamps thereafter. During braking, your vehicle brake vehicle drives of you ahead shortly offagain can also accelerate from a complete ifstop the follow this action within the and given scope can system the stop, toacomplete slows you necessary. In addition, if the vehicle ahead of throttle setting lightly and if applies brakes the the automatically decreases setting, system the with speed. Based onyour selected distance can vary the following distance, which will vary setting. your Youto maintain selected distance vehicle asthatofthe tothe speed ahead same same lane, the system willreduce yourvehicle's approach a slower vehicle ahead of you in the ing at the selected speed, you begin to while cruis- If, example, for adjustments. stant flow with trafficthe without con- having tomake vehicle's thatyou speed so automatically can cruise control will, limits, your within adjust you encounter slower vehicles ahead, active aholding steady cruisingIn addition to if speed, responsibly. and safely it use Please while increasing your enjoyment of driving. and tension, reduce fatiguecan system the tion, conges- traffic in and trips longer on Especially signs, redsigns, lights, object any thatis or detect stop Active cruisecontrol cannot l systems which you may the navigation system is notavailable. navigationthe system when you leave the map area, this influence of When the vehicle position is unknown, e.g. latest ifthe DVD possible. navigation road to the are you driving on. accelerating and braking page to refer drive, the in is DVD navigation a If Professional* navigation system feel results. the brake pedal, a differentsomewhat braking When the system brakes and you also depress feel pedalBrake booths. Itbooths. is also important to regulate your interchanges, service/parking areas or toll snow, strongas rain or fog; whenor entering way off-ramps; during inclement weather such highas such curves sharp with roads or roads rush hour; oncurvy, winding roads, slippery asduring traffic such heavy driving situations; not use the system in city driving; in complex Do traffic. slow-moving as in as well smoothly relatively moving is traffic where roadways control is intended for use on highway-type cruise Active conditions. weather and visibility, ofroad, onthetraffic, basis the to use system ling the vehicle. The driver should decide when adjusting speed, braking or otherwise control- in awareness and alertness responsibility, ence, stitutes for the driver's own personal experi- active cruise control in no way reduces orsub- withAs conventional cruise control systems, during normal traffic. and understand the system, only then use it used to the system. After you have experience get can you conditions sothat road clear and first trytraffic during the Please system sparse Applications range of applications.range of ofthe agoodcommand its and system to obtain on thesystem limitations beginning onpage 132 the current course of the road, always use use always road, the of course current the To ensure that the system is informed of , within limits , within the < behavior of the vehicle vehicle ofthe behavior 67 system adjusts the the adjusts system < 71

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Driving page system while stopped, refer to While stopped, can you However, km/h. activate also the 180 mph/ km/h, and the maximum speed is 110 30 mph/ initialThe minimum activationspeed is 20 ofanaccident. risk or elevated law the of violation a to lead which result can tions vehiclefront inof you. Otherwise, driving condi- cially when the system is actively following a action or apply the brakes if necessary, espe- applicable legal limits. Always be ready totake within setting distance and speed vehicle's 5 4 3 2 1 leverOne forallfunctions to While stopped, page refer to page Selecting distanceto vehicle driving ahead, page to refer tance, Activating stored desired speed and dis- ing refersystem, to page page to refer Interrupting, reducingStoring and desired speed Storing and increasing desired speed 70 . 68 69 . 69 , or driving off, refer off,refer , or driving 70 70 69 , or deactivat- , or the instrument cluster.the is indicated on the speedometer and briefly in The system stores thecurrent vehicle speed. It ner as increasingdesired ner as your speed. functionsThese areoperated inthe same man- displayed. beyond, arrow or Press tap the lever to the resistance point or Increasing desired speed lever, the arrowTap Storing currentspeed > > achieved on a clear road. The speed then displayed is stored and played. Pull the lever, arrow Reducing desired speed of the km/h speedometer display. displayspeedometer or the next placetens increases to the next fives place of the mph resistance point,the desired speed time lever Each the beyond is tapped the km/h. mph/1 by approx. 1 tance point, the desired speed is increased lever tothe time the tapped is Each resis- 1 , until the desired speed is dis- 2 1 , until the desired speed is , or briefly pull , or arrow it, 2 . Selecting distance accident could result. an of risk or law the of violation a Otherwise, for distance. safe following recommendations driving State and laws traffic, applicable ditions, ment cluster. instru- the in displayed is distance selected The > > Reduce distance. Briefly press rocker switch upward: Increase distance. Briefly press rocker switch downward: priate following distance, given roadcon- appro- judgment the toselect Use good you activate the system. the activate you when set always is distance This 4 Distance 3 Distance 2 Distance 1 Distance < risk of an accident. by braking andsteering. Otherwise, there is a > > > > > > > rupted: inter- In automatically is the system addition, out. changes color and the distance indicator goes pedal. The marking in the speedometer the vehicle stopped also depress the brake Pressthedownward, leverupward or with and control cruise Interrupting The displays appear in the instrument cluster. Press button Press While driving distance storeddesiredspeed and Resuming is covered with dirt, refer topage shoulderguard orrails, or if the radar sensor a without roads traveled infrequently on e.g. oftime, period extended an for objects when the system does not recognize any the driver's door with the vehicle stopped open and belt safety the release you when when youapply thehandbrake when DSCcomes on vated is activated iswhen DTC DSC or deacti- shift you transmission when the when youapply thevehicle brakes essary for the driver to actively intervene intervene actively to driver the for essary If the is interrupted, system then is it nec- 4 . < 69 71

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Driving > the by stop system: toacomplete braked complete andstop your vehicle has beenalso If a detected vehicle in front of you brakes to a Otherwise the vehicle can roll. andapply handbrake. the transmission matic > 1. deactivated: or rupted brake pedal depressed and the system is inter- If you are stopped behind a vehicle with the 3. 2. While stopped speed and distance are deleted. desired the stored off,and turn displays The > > > Deactivating system the markingthe while off drives you of front in vehicle the If the marking the while off drives you of front in vehicle the If thing. accelerate without you todoany- having speedometer is green, your vehicle will the accelerator the pedal button press or Rolling bars in the distance indicator distance the in bars Rolling lever, arrow speed orselect a desired speed with the button Press off. driven thatthe mean vehicle in front of has you button depress the accelerator pedal orpress off,briefly you drives of in vehicle front If the brake pedal. the Release Switch ignition. offthe pedal depressed. When stopped,thesamewith do the brake driving. while Press the lever upward or downward twice unn,egg oiinPofthe auto- running, engage position Before leaving the vehicle withthe engine 4 . 70 1 1 1 4 orarrow is orange, you briefly depress for the desired speed in the to activate a stored desired desired astored to activate 2 . < 3 4

. over. take until actively you brakes system The tions. speed and driving style tothetraffic conditions. responsibilityof for the the adjusting desired However, this display cannot relieve the driver ahead. driving vehicle distance the restore to the not automatically ation may currentlyation may notbe met. 4 3 2 1 Displaysin instrument cluster Warning lamps Brief display of stored desired speed driven off The bars roll: the vehicle in front of you has activated is tem indicatorThe lights as sys- up as the soon Selected distance tovehicle ahead warnings on information all read please warnings, for used also Display Lights upyellow: vehicle detected ahead > > Stored desired speed briefly,the conditions necessary foroper- km/h appears ---mph/--- If the display Orange: the system is interrupted. Green: the system is active. The indicator The indicator DSC or interven- result ofABS systemare longer no met, e.g. as a The prerequisitesfor operating the yellow. flashes vehicle yourself. The system can- system The yourself. vehicle must brake and/or maneuver the The system indicates that you nal sounds. 2 2 continuously flashes red; a sig- a red; flashes < following a vehicle in front of you. essary, especially whenthe system is actively or action theready totake if apply brakes nec- setting within applicable legal limits. Always be to regulate your vehicle's anddistance speed parking areas or toll Itbooths. is also important fog; or when entering interchanges, service/ inclement weather such as snow, strong rain or sharp curves such as highway off-ramps; during with roads or roads slippery roads, winding curvy, on situations; driving complex in driving; city in system this use not Do smoothly. atively way-type roadways where traffic is moving rel- Active cruise controlis intended for use free- on conditions. weather visibility, and traffic, road, decide when to use the system on the basis of controlling the vehicle. The driver should ness in adjusting speed, braking orotherwise aware- and alertness responsibility, personal for driver's or diminishes the own substitutes Radar sensors System limitations 2 1 the bumper oftheLocation short-range sensors behind sensor Long-range tems, active active tems, cruise control no in way withAs conventional cruise control sys- < amount of alertness. vehicle in front of you and requires a heightened allows your setting comevehicle closer to a to be aware that every decrease in the distance cally brake, norprovide awarning toyou. Also, automati- will neither system as the situations especiallyalert whenencountering anythese of objects such as motorcycles or bicycles. Be that the moving notdetect smaller may system possible It also is asa ahorseback. on rider such or ofpotential traffic other types pedestrians not tooncoming traffic, react does system when a vehicle is stalled in your lane. Also, the trafficlighapproaching a in the lane ahead of you, for example when vehicle, stopped orvehicle stationary object is your avery slow-moving vehicleslow when notapply the will The or tion. system brakes heavily in stop-and-go traffic during accelera- vehicles driving ahead if they suddenly brake notdetect may system example, the For tions. activated. damage, theactive cruise control cannot be If the sensor is not due toaligned properly, e.g. short-range sensors. the Do not apply adhesive labels etc. in the area of careful in removing layers of snow and ice. range sensors. Whendoing so, be particularly wellas as the bumper area covering the short clean the radar sensor under the front bumper the detection of vehicles ahead. If needed, or limit dirt,snow also can rainice and Heavy ity ofthesystem dohavephysical limita- thethat range abil-and remember Always < t or parked vehicle or or vehicle parked or t 71

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Driving distance settings. distance when you are fullyof aware the priorand speed only system then the reactivate should You ing. driver must intervene and resume manual brak- the means which brakes, vehicle the activate will nolongerruption, system automatically the inter- any After deactivates neutral/N, or DSC. to from drive/D transmission the shifts brakes, or apply thebrakes if necessary. action take to ready be Always to you. next lane toreact actually to a vehicle the system in the cause may or ofyou front vehicle in to a reaction delay freewayinthe a cause system'son may a Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner offramp. km/hdue tolegal regulations. 30 mph/ radar is deactivated at speeds under 20 system the stations, astronomy radio Near areas in the road. raised trailer or before aheavy with grades, considerably more difficult, e.g. on steep uphill off driving in thatmake situations automatically The system cannot allow the vehicle to drive off celed. and any settings you have selected are can- off,too, switched cruise fully is control active engine ignition, offthe or switch you When vene if necessary. traffic and constantly monitor must inter- driver reduce the stored desired speed; however, the Active cruise control may brake when you whenever the driver applies the vehicle In addition, is the system interrupted highway a for lane exit an into pull you certain interruptwhen theBe system to < 72 < Swerving vehicles vehicles. tostopped react must react yourself, as the system does not vehicle and unexpectedly changes lanes, you If a vehicle in front of you is behind a stopped lane Unexpected change an accident. actionTake yourself,otherwise there a is risk of brake and/or maneuver the vehicle yourself. in front ofyou,it will indicate thatyou must establishedhas vehiclesystemis indeed a that when quickly approaching atruck. Once the between your vehicle and vehicles ahead, e.g. This also applies to great differences in speed distance automatically. the selected to restore vehicle until it is completely in your lane. your does notdetect into lane,the system the lanes adjacent of out swerves vehicle a When into your lane, the system your lane, notbeinto themay able system When a vehicle ahead suddenly swerves < Behaviorcurves in ation by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal. case, youcan choose to overcome the deceler- accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either not may and curve a in is vehicle your if sense adjacent the In can lane. addition, the system cruise control might react vehiclebriefly to a in In approaching curve, a it curves view ofthe andterrain of roadway. the thatis driver the toselect aspeed prudent in ognized late, notatall.or Therefore, it is up to leys of hilly roads, vehiclea ahead may be rec- possible thatin curves oronthe and peaks val- Because the of limited range the of system,is it ofacurve. start the advance. Therefore, select a suitable speed at curve. However, it cannot detect curves in high, the system reduces the speed within a If the selected desired speed for a curve is too is possible that active active that possible is front of you ofyou front range.at close booth orwhen a muchslower vehicle cuts in your speed suchown as approaching a toll than speed lower atamuch traveling vehicle vehicle ahead. Example: when you approach a ences in speed between your vehicle and the not decrease your speed dueto large differ- cle braking system. Therefore, the system can- and does not utilize fullthe capacity ofthe vehi- uses aportiononly ofbraking system capacity when youreduce yourdesired speed sharply. It e.g. brakes toapply the limited, also tem is sys- the of ability the that aware be to important it is ahead, vehicle aslower approach you tor pedal.tor do notinterfere ofthe with accelera- movement other onthe objects or floorvehicle floormats not tobrakeeven if necessary. Be certain that on the accelerator pedal will cause the system your foot activated, resting system with the ing driv- While setting. distance and speed cruising erator, the system will once again control your released.fullyAsas soon you releaseaccel- the indicator off untiltance the turns pedal is fully is interrupted by action system the dis- and the responsibility Driver interventions and your braking your vehicle automatically when While active cruise control is capable of accelerator pedal, any automatic pedal, automatic braking any accelerator Anytime the driver presses down on the < 73 <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything under control To set time and date, anddate, topage refer To set time page ControlDisplay, refer Units to measureon of You can set the unit of measure refer topage lever, signal in turn the button CHECK the Press theTo request date: time are the displayed. and From radio readiness, the outside temperature temperature display,clock Odometer, outside control under Everything If the display drops to +37 displaythe to If drops temperature Outside warning 3 2 1 an increasedan danger ice. of sage appears on the Control Display. There is sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A mes- your risk of accident increases. ofaccident risk your otherwise,roadways; shaded bridges and on > > button: Press Odometer and trip odometer Time, outside temperature, and date 84 +37 Ice can form temperatures evenat above displayed temperatureare odometerbriefly and with outside ignition switched off, time, reset is with ignition switched on,trip odometer . 7 /+3 80 74 . 6 . Drive especially carefully, 7 /+3 < 7 6 or 82 , asignal 6 . on the onthe flow offuel is flow theinterrupted engine. to protect Tachometer Checking coolant level, level, Checking coolant topage refer Display. Control onthe appears a message addition, In up. lights lamp warning a hot, too become the andthereforeShould coolant engine the Coolant temperature ing field, arrow Be sure to avoid engine speeds in the red warn- arrow field, warning advance Avoid engine speeds in the white-striped 2 . At high revs in this range, the the range, this in revs high At . 1 , if possible. 220 . approx. 340 approx. Engine oil temperature* ensured and damage can occur. are engine not functions otherwise km, 50 message remains on the Control Display. the km, miles/50 30 ofapprox. arange Below the cruising range is shown in the computer. brieflymessage Display; ontheControl appears the reached, a quantity has After reserve been Reserve example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly. for areas, mountainous in driving are you when If the tilt ofthe vehicle varies for a longer period, onrefuelingmation onpage liters. Youcan find infor- gal/10 US approx. 2.6 liters, including thereserve capacity of 70 gal/ US Fuel tankcapacity: 18.5 approx. Fuel gauge ature is between 160 approx. engineDuringtemper- oil the normaloperation, sage sage is shown ontheControl Display. If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes- riigrneflsblw3 miles/ 30 cruisingfalls below range Refuel as soon as possible once your 7 /170 6 . 208 7 < /70 . 6 and and > > > > specified order: the in displayed is information following The the Press turnbutton the on signal lever. Displaysinstrument in cluster Computer 2 seconds. BCthe buttonin turn approx.the signal for lever To reset the average fuel consumption: press timethe during which engine the is running. The average fuel consumption is calculated for fuel Average consumption onds. ton in turn 2sec- for the signal lever approx. To reset the average speed: press the BC but- of average speed. calculations the in included not are off switched Periodswith the vehiclethe parkedengine and Average speed ensured and damage can occur. are not engine functions otherwise km, 50 km. 30 miles/ basedon the driving style over the last 20 with the remaining fuel. Therange is projected availablecruising range estimated the Displays range Cruising No information Average fuel consumption Average speed Cruising range riigrneflsblw3 miles/ 30 cruisingfalls below range Refuel as soon as possible once your 75 <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything under control 3. 4. > > 2. 1. operating principle page refer to You can also call upthecomputer via iDrive, for Displayson Control Display Trip computer. ControlDisplay, referfollowing the to to and consumption fortwodifferent routes onthe You can display the average speed and average For different routes Select "Car Data" and press the press controller. and Data" "Car Select Data". troller. Select "Onboard info" and press the con- > > remaining distance: arrivaland atdestination time of Estimated Cruising range Without navigationWithout system "Navigation". button. controller the Move tothe right toopen This opens the start menu. the Press system Entering adestination in thenavigation puter, see below. com- the in manually distance a Entering 76 * , refer to , refer to page 132 * : open "Car "Car : open 16 . . 3. tion system tion during the destination guidance ofthe naviga- The distance is automatically predetermined 3. 2. 1. manually a distance Entering 2. 1. average fuel consumption: can resetYou the valuesforaverage and speed valuesResetting 2. 1. for example. trip, vacation a for suitable is computer trip The Trip computer > > Select "Car Data" and press the controller. Data". Press the controller the toapply the Press setting. difference. agreater toenter resistance aslight against your destination. If necessary, hold it to Turn controller distance the toselect the controller. the andpress todest." "Distance Select Press the controller again to confirm. controller. desiredtheSelectpress and menuitem the Without navigationWithout system "Navigation". Open Open the start menu. Average fuel consumption Average speed * . * : open "Car "Car : open 4. 1. puter in assistance window. the You can display the computer or the trip com- Display options 2. 1. values: all Switching trip computer on/off and resetting > > > > > 2. troller. Select "Trip computer" and press the controller. con- the press and window assistance the to change rightto the to controller the Move controller. Select the desiredmenu itemand press the Select "Set" and press the controller. Average fuel consumption Average speed traveled Distance Driving time Departure time > > Select amenu item: "Trip computer". "Trip info" "Onboard Service requirements Service 4. 3. 2. 1. ple refer topage using the Control Display, for operating princi- You can view more detailed information by Additional information remote control.the outthe reading in by datastored requirements the ignition switched on. the nextmaintenance are displayedbriefly with The remaining driving distancefor and thedate 3. Select "Service" and press the controller. ler. control- the press and sources" "Info Select menu. Pressthe controller the open to menu. start the Open Press the controller. mine your vehicle's current service Your BMW Service Advisor can deter- 16 < . 77

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything under control 5. 6. eette arrow and press the controller. Select the To exit fromthe menu: Select entry and the press controller.the every entry. can request You more informationdetailed on mandated officialinspections. maintenance procedures, as well as legally and service selected of a list shows display The selected and press the controller. the press and selected controller until "Service requirements" is fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe Select "Status" and press the controller. the press and "Status" Select 78 arrange a service appointment. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. ensured. tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not correctly, refer to page the on sure date Make Controlthe Display is set inspections* Entering deadlines for legally required Symbols controller. The month is selected. is month The controller. the press and date" service "Set Select controller. the andpress inspection" "State Select controller. the press and "Status" Select controller. the press and selected controller until "Service requirements" is toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe Select "Service" and press thecontroller. ler. "InfoSelect sources" and press thecontrol- menu. Press the controller to open the Open the start menu. The service deadline has already passed. already has deadline service The inspection is approaching. Please official an or service for deadline The required. currently is service No 83 ; otherwise, the effec- 9. different combinations and colors. and combinations different in up light can lamps warning and indicator The Indicator and warning lamps ofthe Display. bottom the Control at messages text signal, and sibly anacoustic pos- cluster, instrument the in lamps warning or Control message this of kind includesindicator ACheck function in systems. monitored the vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal- CheckThe Control functionsmonitors in the concept The ControlCheck arrow presscontroller. and the Selectthe To exit from the menu: 12. 11. 10. Turn the controller to make the adjustment. the make controller to the Turn The date entry is stored. setting. the apply to controller the Press adjustment. the make controller to the Turn selected. is year The setting. the apply to controller the Press Explanatory text messages as soon as the soon as as corresponding lamp lights up. willbe shown this information In urgentcases, tobe actions below. see taken, sponding corre- and ofamalfunction tothe cause as regarding most Check Control messages, e.g. You can display supplementary information displayed. lamps warning and trol Display explain the meaning of indicatorthe Text messages at the bottom edge theof Con- refer to page sages are stored and can be viewed later, also mes- text and lamps warning of combinations been hidden afterhas sage time. The ashort remains visible even if the CheckControl mes- message has been generated. Thesymbol This symbol means that a Check Control Control aCheck that means symbol This 80 . 79

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything under control eette arrow and press the controller. Select the To exit the displayed information: Hiding Check Control messagesHiding Check 1. messages Control stored Check Displaying cannot be hidden. If anu until the malfunctions have been rectified. They Some Check Control messages are displayed CHECK button in turn the the signal Press lever. 2. seconds, but remain stored.approx. 20 are automatically hiddenOther messages after succession. in tions occur simultaneously, they are displayed The first stored message is displayed. button the Press longer: press the button. the press message appears new timeyouA each button: the Press 80 mber of these malfunc- iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for Displaying supplementary information eette arrow and press the controller. Select the To exit from the menu immediately: 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Select a message and press the controller. is selected and press the controller. controller until "Che toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe controller. the press and selected Turn the controller until "Service" is controller. the press and selected Turn the controller until "Info sources" is menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press inciple refer topage ck Control messages" 16 . Displaying the urgency of malfunctions of urgency the Displaying > > The display: button repeatedly. sages are present, you canpress the CHECK several mes- button forapprox. 2 seconds. If the messages once again. Press the CHECK Before thedisplay disappears, you can display ignition.the are shown consecutively when you switch off Malfunction reports generated during the trip Displays aftercompletionof trip vice requirements display, refer topage ser- the of status the indicate also symbols The following symbols: Control messages are also displayed with the Depending on the equipment, the stored Check onds 2sec- for buttonagain approx. the CHECK pressing time by any at off be turned can period abrief offautomatically turns after the Control Display. Control the supplementary information is shown on systems. Depending on the malfunction, Malfunctions detected thein monitored systems. tored moni- the in detected malfunctions No 77 . 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage limit changing or setting Displaying, km/h. mph/5 againby at least3 it below falls speed vehicle your if time second You are only warned reachingof this speed a an urban area. in limit speed a exceed you if warnings receive speed. This enables you, for example, to this message indicates when you have reached You can enter a speed and a CheckControl Speed limit Select "On" and press the controller. Activating limit speed as the limit. controller. Thesystem applies your current Select "Select current speed" and press the Applying yourcurrent speedlimit as The The is automatically limit switched on. The The is automatically limit on. switched setting. the apply to controller the Press enter a greater difference. to resistance slight a it against hold sary, Turn controller the the toset If limit. neces- troller. con- the press and value speed the Select controller. the press and "Limit" Select Select"Car Data" and press thecontroller. Data". Without navigation system navigation Without "Navigation". Open menu. start the Open 81 * : open "Car "Car : open 16 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything under control 4. 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for Stopwatch ground. the continues tooperate in back- stopwatch count. stopwatch primary The interim time appears below the ongoing Select "Interim time" and press the controller. Taking an intermediate time reading > > > or resetting stopping, Starting, ler. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control- the press controller. and Data" "Car Select Data". Without navigationWithout system "Navigation". Open Open the start menu. This stops the stops timer. This Select "Stop" and press the controller. runningwas beforehand. The stopwatch is reset and it restarts if it Select "Reset" and press the controller. the starts displayed stopwatch at time. The Select "Start" and press the controller. even while the stopwatch is running. The available remain functions other the of All < 82 inciple refer topage * : open "Car "Car : open 16 . iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for Settings on Control Display 3. 2. 1. 2. 1. Setting time selected and press the controller. the press and selected Turn controllerthe until is "Settings" menu. Press the controller to open the or button once untiltwice menu appears. start the the Press top. tothe tochange essary first thefield from the nec- if front controller to the Move once controller. the press and selected Turn controllerthe until is /Date" "Time inciple refer topage 16 . 3. Select "Hour memo" and press the controller. each hour. willYou topof hear justbefore the three tones hour signal* Activating The changed time is stored. 2. 1. settingsMaking 4. The signalhour is activated. and press the controller. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected press the controller. Turn controller the the and toset minutes press the controller. Turn controller the the toset and hours selected and press the controller. Turn the controller until "Set time" is 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. date Setting rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 2. 1. Setting 12h/24h format iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage thechange base setting. ambient lighting conditions. However, you can brightnessThe adapted the is automatically to Display Control of Brightness rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 2. 1. format date Setting rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- last adjustment, the the stored. is adjustment, date last the the adjustments. After Make remaining The next adjustment is selected. setting. the apply to controller the Press adjustment. the make controller to the Turn month. the case this in selected, The display section is first date of the Select "Set date" and press the controller. Select "Date" and press the controller. controller. Select the desired format and press the ler. Select "Timeformat" press and control- the controller. Select the desired format and press the ler. Select "Date format" and press the control- 83 16 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything under control 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. rently in use. in rently settingThe is for stored the controlremote cur- 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for pressure. consumption, distances, temperature and You can change theunits of measure for fuel Units of measure press the controller. controller until "Brightness" is selected and fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe controller. the settings" andpress "Display Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press is selected. Turn the controller until the desired setting to select "Display". the If necessary, move controller right to the the controller. controller until "Units" is selected and press fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe controller. the press / and Units" "Language Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press 84 inciple refer topage 16 . iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for Language on Control Display rently in use. in rently settingThe is for stored the controlremote cur- 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. currently in use. control the remote for are stored settings The 8. 7. 6. controller. Select the desired language and press the thefor text displays. troller. Youcan select con- language" press the and "TextSelect press the controller. controller until "Languages" is selected and toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe controller. the press / and Units" "Language Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press press the controller. andthe desired measureSelect unit of Press the controller. Select the set. item tobe menu inciple refer topage adifferent language 16 . too late. too activated warning tobe thecould system cause circumstances physical the otherwise, speed; parking. Avoid approachin approached slowly, isas usually the case when m. ft/1.50 rear sensors at approx. 5 the center cm, for and in/60 24 atapprox. ners cor- rear front two atthe andatthe sensors the for sounds first warning acoustic an However, m. ft/2 range ofthese sensors 7 is approx. The are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper. your vehicle. measureTo the distance, there from totheyou ofanobject behind approach Acoustic signals and an optical display anoptical and signals Acoustic assistsPDC are parking.when youThe you concept The PDC Park Distance Control* safety Technology for comfort, convenience and Press the button; button; lights the up. LED Press the Switchingmanually on before thisWait short drivingtime off. orrunning ignition the switched on. into selector Rwith engine lever position the the move intoond after or shift you reverse The system starts to operate approx. one sec- Switchingautomatically on presence of objects when they are being the indicate aid can that aparking is PDC < g an object athigh * alert alert > > 3seconds: An intermittent istone interrupted after approx. sounds. cm, thena continuous tone ft/30 roughly 1 below to falls object nearest the to distance the become shorter. the between If tones intervals between vehicle and object decreases, the the left As the distance rear speaker, etc. vehicle will be indicated tothe detected leftThus, anobject rear ofthe the vehicle from an beingobject approached. An intermittent indicates signal the distance of tones Signal reactivate the system manually as needed. switched off and the LED goes out. You can is system km/h, the mph/30 20 approx. mor at over ft/50 After driving 165 approx. Automatic deactivation goes out. the LED Press the button again; Switching off manually at least 4 in/10 cm tothem. cm 4in/10 at least of adistance maintain and for periods ers long clean- with high-pressure sensors the not spray that they will continue to operate effectively. Do cleanand freeice of or snow inorderto ensure aAs preventive measure, keep the sensors functioning. Have the system checked. mal- is PDC Display. Control the on appears amessage and flashes button in the LED The Malfunction if you drive parallel to a wall a to parallel drive you if only detected byone of the corner sensors if youremain in frontofanobject thatwas by asignal tone from 85

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technology for comfort, convenience and safety soon as PDC is activated. is as PDC soon as Display Control the on appears display The 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for control currentlyin use. The the stored is for sounds. setting remote asignal tone before there shown already are Control Display. Objects that are farther away toanobject approach the onthe show tem canalso enjoy the You ofhaving sys- option the PDC with visual warning* 5. 4. 3. 6. rs h otolrt pnte menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press the controller. press and selected is "PDC" until controller fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe controller. the press and selected Turn the controller until "Vehicle / Tires" is controller. the press and selected Turn controllerthe until "Settings" is troller. Select "PDC display on" and press the con- ThePDC screen is activated. 86 inciple refer topage 16 . tone. may prevent hearing youfrom the PDC signal Loud noisesoutside from insideand the vehicle injury or damage. property otherwise,care; danger personal of therea is cannot detected. For be this reason, drive with sounds. Higher,objects, protruding e.g.ledges, already tone after or a before continuous again the from area detection sensors the of pear disap- also can curbs, e.g. displayed, already and wedge-shaped objects etc. Low objects bars andtrailer with tow tered couplings, or thin sonic measurement, such as those encoun- ofultra- thatapply to all limits physical forms detected. Thesystem is also subject to the be cannot objects which in spot blind a is there the driver. Even when sensors are involved, vehicle and anyobstacles alwaysremains with System limits a lanechange. braking while corneringwhenor brakingduring vehicle stability and steering response when This system provides further enhancements to Cornering CBC Brake Control page to braking, refer onsafe information For engine. ABS is operational every time you start the driving safety. even during hard braking. This increases active braking. Safe steering response is maintained the prevents wheelsABS locking during from AntilockABS Brake System vehicle stability under extreme conditions. maintain and toenhance designed systems of Your is BMW equipped with an extended array systems controlDriving stability < 126 estimating the distance between the the between estimating distance final with PDC, for responsibility Even . for thefor duration full of the braking. notreduceDo the pressure brake onthe pedal vided byABS. exploitsing. This system est possible braking distance during full brak- short- the achieve to helps thus and boost force produces automatically braking maximum the brakesWhen youapplythe rapidly, this system assistantBrake stable deceleration. cationpressure theat rear wheels ensure to This system controls the brake system's appli- distribution brake-force Electronic wiserisk there accident.a isan of safetymargin with a risky driving style,asother- driver. Therefore, do not restrict the additional style always remains the responsibility of the ently in the individual wheels. engine output and by applying the brakes differ- physical the reducing the within by limits course cases, DSC helps the vehicle safely stay on sliding the of vehicle inits frontwheels. Inthese ofthe or rear vehicle aloss atthe oftraction as such conditions, driving unstable identifies also system The accelerating. and off starting when traction prevents loss in DSC drivingthe wheels Control Stability Dynamic DSC withfu thestop-and-go In conjunction with the active cruise control Adaptive brake assistant* with the brake assistant. the with responds evenmore quickly during braking brake the that ensures assistant brake even with DSC. An appropriateDSC. An even with driving The laws physicsof cannotberepealed, nction, the adaptive adaptive the nction, all of the benefits pro- benefits of the all < vate DSC again as soon aspossible. assoon again DSC vate supportTo enhanced operatingstability, reacti- there. appears that Please note any supplementary information A message appears on the Control Display. page DSC is deactivated. DSC up: lights lamp indicator The active steering active out. The oftheintervention stability-promoting forwardcarriedno will longer momentum be promoting stability and together. Interventions Traction andDSC deactivatedControl are seconds. DTC Dynamic longer than approx. 10 cluster instrument lights the up, butnotfor in indicator buttonuntil lamp DSC the Press the Deactivating DSC with appropriate caution. with limited driving stability. Therefore, drive tem ensures maximum forward momentum, but is optimized for forward momentum. Thesys- uncleared e.g. roads, tions, that snow-covered DTC is a variant of DSCfor special road condi- DTC Dynamic Trac For better control instrument cluster goes out. the Press indicator button; the in lamp the Activating DSC 93 brake forces. DSC is controlling the drive forces and The indicator lamp flashes: . * is also deactivated, refer to tion Control 87

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technology for comfort, convenience and safety > > > under the following special circumstances: You may find it useful tobriefly activate DTC tiously and drivetiouslydefensively and avoiding whilefull Activating DTC systems Malfunctionin driving stability control thein instrument cluster goes out. lamp indicator DTC the buttonagain; the Press Deactivating DTC For better control instrument cluster lights up. the indicator in DTC button;the lamp the Press When driving with snow chains starting off in deep snow or on loose ground When rocking a stuck vehicle free or when on unplowed, snow-covered road surfaces or slush, in inclines, snowy on driving When shouldremember proceed to cau- tions. While you may continue, you ciency remains available without limita- braking effi- Conventional failed. have systems control stability driving The sage on appears the Control Display. orMonitor FlatTire Monitor. Ames- Pressure andTireDSC for ABS, lamps lights up,together with indicator the The warninglamp for the brake system is activated.DTC up: lights lamp indicator The brake forces. DSC is controlling the drive forces and The indicator lamp flashes: 88 * and itbegins toroll back. seconds longerholds the vehicle after approx. 2 no assistant the starting otherwise off quickly, releasing the footbrake, drive footbrake. After 2. 1. required for this purpose. isnot handbrake The slopes. conveniently on off start to you enables assistant starting The Starting assistant possible. defective. Have the system checked as soon as as soon as possible. remains operational. Have the system checked tions are no longer available. The vehicle DSC and DTC. The stability maintenance func- thesystemHave checked as as possible. soon the or Flat Tire Monitor is also malfunctioning. brake applications. TheTire Pressure Monitor Release the footbrake and and offquickly. footbrake drive the Release Hold the vehicle with the footbrake. for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the the after releasing seconds 2 approx. for vehicle the holds assistant starting The malfunction on Canadian models. Canadian on malfunction Display of the previously described is assistant The brake Control Display. onthe appears yellow. A message up The brake system warning lamp lights malfunctionplay. A occurred has in the Dis- onthe Control appears message A up. lights lamp indicator DSC The models. Canadian on malfunction Display of the previously described < time time the start you engine. each status operational assumes system The ofasecond. fractions through closed-loop controlcycleslastingonly operation, the system continuously runs vehicle During line. straight a in proceeding is andcomfort-oriented vehicle when the smooth from performance-oriented during cornering to ance adapts to suit driving conditions, varying the front and rear axles. Suspension compli- DynamicDrive based is active on stabilizers on evasive maneuvers. mizes vehicle stability during cornering and Dynamic Drive minimizes body roll and opti- concept The Dynamic Drive* drop in all four tires. four all in drop and does notdetect a natural, even pressure severe tire damage caused byoutside factors The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate sudden limits System sure and after every tire or wheel change. inflation pressure. system must be initialized at the correct tire signaling the of a flat reliable the tire, To ensure requirement Functional tire. flat asa reports changeit and this detects system rotationof speed the correspondingwheel. The in the rolling circumference and therefore the pressureIn the event a of loss, there changeisa ual wheels during driving. one tirecomparingby the speedsthe ofindivid- The Flat Tire Monitor detects apressure lossin concept The FTM FlatTire Monitor* every correction of the tire inflation pres- after repeated be must initialization The < 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage snow chains snow with driving when system the initialize not Do matically continued. drivingWhen resumes, the initializationauto- is Initializing system Initializing > > > > malfunction: or delayed be could system the situations, following In the the controller. press and selected is "FTM" until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. con- the press and / Tires" "Vehicle Select selected and press the controller. Turn controller the until is "Settings" menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press Driving with snow chains high lateral acceleration Sporty drivingstyle: slip inthe drive wheels, Driving onsnow-covered or slippery roads System has not beeninitialized which canbe interrupted atanytime. The initialization finishes during driving, * . < 89 * 16 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technology for comfort, convenience and safety 8. 7. 6. The initialization is completed during driving. during completed is initialization The 9. 1. pressure loss. sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation 2. 3. Indicationflat tire ofa Select "Yes" and press the controller. Select "Reset" and press the controller. the Start driving. butdonotstart engine, played. The message "resetting FTM…" is dis- todrive.Start can result in serious accidents. page to refer factory, from the came it when km/h. mph/80 exceed a speed of 50 ing and steering maneuvers and donot below mph/8050 km/h. Avoid severe brak- Cautiouslythe reduce vehiclespeed to must then be initialized.must then may not have been initialized. Thesystem next opportunity. Check theair pressure inall four tires at the > following guidevalues: the tires, on based distance for continued driving on run-flat kPa, the canestimate possible you psi/0 0 tire In theloss, event pressure of complete prx 5 ie/5 km. miles/250 approx. 155 1 to2 persons without luggage: With lowload: play. In addition, an acoustic signal anacoustic addition, play. In Dis- onthe Control appears message The warning lamp lights up in red. A 214 equipped with run-flat tires, as withequipped run-flat tires, as was it Stop driving if the vehicle is no longer tires is correct, the Flat Tire the Tire correct, is Flat tires Monitor four all in pressure inflation tire the If 90 . Continued driving after a flat tire < < every tire or wheel change. ensured. erwise fault-free operation of the system is not Always usewheels electronics,with TPM oth- correct tire inflation pressure. the been reset have with must the tire, system In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat Functional requirement erably in one or several tires. consid- dropped has pressure inflation tire the four mounted tires. The system reports when checksTPM the tire inflation pressure in the concept The TPM TirePressure Monitor* but instead center.contact BMW your cause an accident. Do not continue driving, tireof the could detached andbecome pieces otherwise, aspossible; assoon tion loca- and atasuitable stop speed Reduce indicate final failure of the damaged tire. while the vehicle is being driven, this can occur noises loud or vibrations unusual If teristics. naturaltances andaltered charac- steering dis- braking extended braking, in stability changes. This includes reduced tracking event of pressure loss, vehicle handling > > tion of the tire inflation pressure andafter tire ofthe tion inflation pressure correc- each after again system the Reset approx. miles/50 30 km. 4 persons, luggage compartment full: With load: full approx. miles/150 94 km. 4 persons without luggage: full, bay or cargo 2 persons, With medium load: pe f5 p/0km/h. In the mph/80 speed of 50 Drive reservedly and do not exceed a < < same radiofrequency. with by other systems or devices which use the electronics, or if TPMis temporarily interfered TPM without tire if hasbeen mounted awheel The systeminactive is cannotdisplay and flat a correct tire inflation pressures. not beenreset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite The system does not function properly if it has ences. System limits System > > > Reasons for this can be: tire. cannotdetect aflat system The Gray Display. Control on the appears Amessage tires. several tire in inflation drop Flat in amajor pressure or All wheelsyellow are Control Display. onthe indicatedthe appears tire. Amessage tire in inflation drop Flat in amajor pressure or is yellow One wheel play. active""TPM is displayed onthe Control Dis- learned the tire pressure set state. matches The Green color.the tion is only required if requested by TPMwith changes during driving into account. A correc- factthattheTPM takes the tire pressure tires. color ofthe tire statusis indicated The the system and by Statusdisplay Control on Display Malfunction quency devices which use the radio same fre- Temporary interference due to systems or TPM is being reset tire damagecaused by external influ- TPM cannotannouncesudden serious < values to be monitored. Resetting finishes dur- finishes Resetting monitored. be to values set the asthe applied in pressures tires are tion ofdriving, afew the minutes After infla- tire set 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage resetting is continued automatically. driving When resumes, time. interrupted atany Resetting finishes during driving, which canbe every tire or wheel change. Resetting system TPM..." is displayed. is TPM..." "Resetting and in gray are shown The tires todrive. Start Select "Yes" and press the controller. Select "Reset" and press the controller. theStart not driving. butdo engine, start the controller. press and selected is "TPM" until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. con- the press and / Tires" "Vehicle Select controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press tion of the tire inflation pressure and after ofthe after tion and pressure inflation tire Reset the system againafter each correc- 91 < 16 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technology for comfort, convenience and safety play. The message "Tire low!" is displayed. is low!" "Tire The message play. onthe inall shown Control yellow tires Dis- are Control Display. ing driving. Thetiresare in shown green onthe failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and the vehicle is beingdriven, this can indicate final If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while characteristics. steering natural altered and braking distances extended includesreduced tracking stabilityin braking, pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This 1. pressure loss. sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation 2. pressure Message withinflationtire low can result in serious accidents. page to refer factory, from the came it when km/h. mph/80 50 ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer- 80 mph/ Cautiously reduce speed tobelow 50 > > > following of the guide values: distance for continued driving on the basis the kPa, canestimate possible you psi/0 0 tire In theloss, event pressure of complete and applying the tire inflation pressures, If aflat duringtire is detected resetting pe f5 p/0km/h. In the event of mph/80 speed of 50 Drive reservedly and do not exceed a approx. miles/50 30 km 4 persons, luggage compartment full: With full load: km miles/150 95 approx. 4 persons without luggage: full, bay or cargo 2 persons, With medium load: km miles/250 approx. 155 1 to2 persons without luggage: With lowload: play. In addition, an acoustic signal anacoustic addition, play. In Dis- onthe Control appears message The warning lamp lights up yellow. A 214 equipped with run-flat tires, as withequipped run-flat tires, as was it Stop driving if the vehicle is no longer 92 . Continued driving after a flat tire < < > > > situations: following the in displayed is this like message A be detected. can tire flat No displayed. is a message and play Malfunction note that the TPMS is for thatthe note not a substitute TPMS vehicle's handling andstopping ability. Please the affect life, tire may and and tread ciency effi- fuel reduces also Underinflation failure. tire tire tooverheattire causes andcanleadthe to sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated possible, andinflate them to the proper pres- as assoon tires check and your stop should low tire pressure indicator illuminates, you the when Accordingly, under-inflated. nificantly indicator whenone or more your of tires are sig- pressure tire a low illuminates TPMS, that tem, withequipped atire pressure sys- monitoring an added safety feature, your vehicle has been proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As pressuretion label, should you determine the size indicated onthevehicle placard ortire infla- the than size ofadifferent tires vehicle has your vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label. If mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the and inflated to the inflation pressure recom- Each tire should be checked monthly when cold Systems FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Declaration according to NHTSA/ center. tinue driving, but contactyour instead BMW detached and cause an accident. Donotcon- otherwise, pieces of the tire could become atasuitable possible; soon locationstop as as same radio frequency. use the which devices or systems other If TPMis withinterfered by temporarily tronics. is elec- TPM without If awheels mounted have the system checked. In case of a malfunction; < are shown in gray on Control Dis- in gray the on shown are then lights up continuously. Thetires The yellow warning lamp flashes and tion properly.tion TPMStocontinue the tofunc- allow and wheels tires alternate or replacement thatthe ensure onyour vehicle wheels to or tires or one more replacingafter indicator malfunction TPMS the functioning from TPMS properly. check Always onthe wheels tires or vehicle that the prevent alternate or ofreplacement ing installation the occur may tions for a variety ofreasons, includ- low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunc- notbe todetect or may able signal system the illuminated, is indicator malfunction the When exists. malfunction the as long as startups cle sequence will continue upon subsequent vehi- This illuminated. continuously remain then and minute one approximately for flash system detects amalfunction,the indicator will with low the tire pressure indicator. When the The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined pressure indicator. to trigger illumination TPMSlow ofthe tire even if underinflation has not reached the level pressure, tire correct tomaintain responsibility proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's switched off, refer topage off,refer switched is DSC when isdeactivated intervention moting before the driver intervenes. This stability-provided bythe driver and thus stabilize the vehicle geted corrections tothesteering angle pro- tar- canmake In system critical the situations, of your BMW over the entire speed range. and more. This improves the handling capability other hand, the steering angle is reduced more very direct. In the higher speed range, on the ing angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes in a town or whenrange, parking, e.g. the steer- When you are driving in the low road speed movements. wheel tothe steering tion ies the steering anglethe offront wheelsinrela- var- actively that system a is steering active The concept The Active steering* 87 . defensively. Have the system checked. system the Have defensively. be deactivated. Proceed cautiously and drive The stability-promoting intervention can also movements in the higher road speed range. cle reacts more sensitively to steering wheel wheel movements are required, while the vehi- longer operational. At low speed, larger steering Brake force display force Brake Malfunction > > On theright: heavy braking. left: normalbraking. On the Display. Theactive steering is no Control isthe on shown a message The warning lamp lights upyellow and 93

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technology for comfort, convenience and safety doors and on the Coupe, the roof pillars along instrument panel, the side trim panels on the stery inthe center the of steering wheel,on the bag system. This category includes theuphol- orwiring individual the in the components air- either tamper with the or notmodify Do vehicle. remove the airbag restraint system from the to way. notattempt any them Do in other modify dents orrear-end collisions. lessevery impactsevere situation, acci- e.g. are deliberately airbags The not triggered in the legs protects colliding withfrom cockpit.the airbag knee head. The the supports airbag head bag thesupports side upper body area. The the event of a side impact. The relevant side air- in protection provide help airbags side and head vide adequate restraint. Whenneeded, the impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro- front passenger by re The front airbags help protect the driver and page on instructions adjustment the follow please Airbags Protective action 5 4 3 2 1 covers: marked The following airbags are located under the Knee airbag Knee airbag Knee Side airbags airbags Head Coupe: airbags Front 47 cover panels of the airbags, cover them or or them cover airbags, the of panels cover tothe materials notapply adhesive Do tinue to provide optimized protection, tinue optimized toprovide con- systems the that safety To ensure . < 94 sponding tofrontalsponding porting children safely, refer topage andfollow the tion instructions under Trans- below. airbags passenger rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front theindicated by over indicator interior lamp the senger side. knee airbags front front, side and the on pas- deactivates or the correspondingly activates face of the front passenger seat. The system uating the impression on the occupied seat sur- The occupation of the seat is detected by eval- passenger airbags Automatic deactivation of front provided on the sunvisors. onthe provided also is the airbags on information and Warnings either of which could result in personal injury. emergency or undesired airbag triggering, service the system could lead to failure in an to attempts unprofessional Otherwise licenses. personnel and has the required explosives repair procedures with appropriately trained ter or a workshop that works according to BMW cen- BMW a generators carriedbag out onlyby ofair- removal, anddisposal testing, repair, the triggering of the airbag restraint system, have ofmalfunctions,deactivation,In the or event because there is a danger of burns. directly after the system been has triggered, nottouchtheDo individual components to remove or dismantle the steering wheel. notattempt ofthe sides headliner.with the Do passenger seat, read the safety informa- safety the read seat, passenger achild in front transporting the Before i.e. deactivated activated, airbags, or is The current status of the front passenger < 56 . < the occupied seat surface cannot be ensured. below. Otherwise, a from correct evaluation of the seat against press could which seat the mended by BMW.Donotplace objects under senger seat unless they are specifically recom- ontothe other pas- or items mats front beaded Do not fit seat covers, seat cushion padding, seat. the transport incorresponding person rear the produced bychanging goes out.If statuscannotbe lamp desired the the indicator and activated are senger airbags thechange position sitting lights upwhen this occurs. Inthese cases, airbags the lamp passenger for front indicator andadults ers certainin sitting positions; the passenger side can be deactivated forteenag- onthe front, and The front knee airbags side > vated. deacti- or activated are airbags passenger front pied. Theindicator lamp shows whether the side depending onwhether the seat is occu- knee and side airbags on the front passenger front, ofthe operating status the indicates bags air- passenger for indicator front The the lamp lamps may differ somewhat. arrangement of the switches and indicator ment packages or in the Convertible, the ment in the Coupe. Withsome vehicle equip- arrange- apossible shows here illustration The airbags Operatingstate offront passenger passenger side are deactivated. The front, kneeand side airbagson the front purposeis properlydetected seat. the on a child restraint system intended for the The indicatorlights lampwhen child a up in the sitting position, so that the front thatthe pas- so < despite an impact of corresponding intensity. accident an in manner expected the in respond there is a danger that the airbag system may not Operational readiness ofairbag system > > malfunctionAirbag system andthe tem safety belt tensioners. operational readiness of the entire airbag sys- the indicating briefly, up lights lamp warning page to refer readiness, radio From > > are not activated. airbags seat has beendetected the front and passenger lights up.Thisairbags child thatthe indicates for that the front lamp the indicator passenger sure make seat, child installing a After factured. atthe the time by vehiclethe NHTSA is manu- Warning lamp lights up continuously. up lights lamp Warning readiness. radio of as up light not does lamp Warning front passenger side are still deactivated. still are side passenger front onthe andsideBut front, airbags the knee theis seat empty. The doesindicator notlight lamp up when passenger side are activated. The front, knee and side airbags the front on height sufficient onthe is detected seat. for example, a correctly seated person of The does notlightindicator lamp up when, ately in case of a malfunction; otherwise, otherwise, amalfunction; in of ately case immedi- checked system airbag the Have tem. Especially Especially childtem. the required seats Most child seats are detected by the sys- < 95 58 , the <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technology for comfort, convenience and safety the multistage airbag restraint system. restraint airbag multistage the accident,severity ofthe beltthe tensioner and the fastened safety belt and,depending on the by protected are you accidents, severe less In have thenecessary headroom. occupants vehicle all that ensures system tion into the windshield frame, the rollover protec- rollover tothe integrated bar asupplement As ond. sec- a of fractions within deployed are restraints rollover bars located behind the rear head gitudinal axis, loss or ofground contact. The lon- the on inclination extreme situation, driving activated in event of the accidentan or acritical The rollover protection system is automatically protection system Convertible: rollover 1. purpose. this for are necessary Notools again. lowered then be can it activation, after automatic impact If the rollover protection system experienced no Lowering 3. 2. position. in hold that and release backward the Press Let go of the release. the of go Let above. from down Press the rollover protection unit halfway rollover protection system clear. Alwayspaththeof movement keepthe of 96 < from the road. the from absorb this information without looking away e.g. navigation instructions.This enablesyou to tion is projected into the driver's field of view, informa- important Display, theWith Head-Up concept The Head-Up Display* refer topage nance intervals of the service requirements, comply with functioning, must the you mainte- system ensurelong-term to a checkand For malfunction. or failure to lead can the system to service attempts Unprofessional only be performed ataBMWcenter. Work on the rollover protection system may wiring. and system tion individual components of the rollover protec- changes No anyof naturemay be madetothe after unexpected triggering. checked system protection rollover the Have 5. 4. over protection unit. protection over Use the same procedure for the second roll- it snaps into place. rollover the protectionunit untilPress down rollover protection system is raised. Never move the convertible top when the 77 . < 3. 2. 1. 3 iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage Selecting displays 2 1 button. the Press on/off Switching Select "Settings" and press the controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press Speed > > > Display instructions Navigation Leavingwarning lane control cruise Active Cruise control 16 . 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage lighting. instrument the with the adjusted be can also knurled wheel of brightness on,the switched beams low the With setting. canchange you the However, base ambient lighting tothe adapted conditions. brightnessThe ofthe is display automatically Setting brightness rentlyuse. in The settings are stored for the remote key cur- 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. selected and press the controller. controller until "Head-Up Display" is Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller. and Select "Display settings" press the controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press Up Display. Press the controller. play. desiredSelect information Dis- Head-Up of selectedis presscontroller. and the Turn the controller until "Head-Up Display" into second Change the thefield from top. selected and press the controller. controller until "Head-Up Display" is Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller. and Select "Display settings" press the The information is shown on the Head- 97 16 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technology for comfort, convenience and safety 6. rently in use. in rently settingThe is for stored the controlremote cur- 7. cle brochure. Caring vehi-the your consultingthis for by topic You canfind everything youneed toknowon Care instructions respondingly trained personnel. according toBMW repair procedures with cor- by a BMW center or a workshop that works Windshield replacement should be carried out displayed.being double from images vents pre- windshield the in film A display. precise a enable to Display Head-Up ofthe requirements shape theof windshield complies with the The windshield is a part of the system. The Specialized windshield center. ataBMW checked setting is If the please the image have distorted, base > > > > play is influenced by: Dis- in Head-Up the displays ofthe visibility The Notes selected and press the controller. the press and selected isTurn controllerthe until "Brightness" into field top. Change second the the from is selected. Turn the controller until the desired setting conditions Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting play Dis- on cover Head-Up the ofthe Objects Certain sitting positions Sunglasses with certain polarization filters 98 are less noticeable, for example in cold weather. cold in example for noticeable, less are surrounding to the little or area, heat radiation difference with little Objects temperature loss. heat blocks which clothing different by affected in shape, since the thermal radiation can be person a as recognizable continually not is son per- a that possible quite is it result, a As itself. radiation ofthe ofheat amount object the on andthe objects and the between background dependent on the temperature difference cooler objects appear darker. Contrast is objects Warmer view. field present in camera's objects of of the the the shows image relativethermal heat radiation resulting The Display. Control the on shown an infrared camera and a generated image is A certain area in front of the vehicle is viewed by reactthen accordingly. can decide which actions are appropriate and driverThe etc. horn the stop, blow ordown slow aheador off to the sides and can bemore alert, presence of persons or animals in the road example, the driver may identify and detect the action For appropriate sooner. totake able When objects are detected, the driver may be animals. larger and people detecting for helpful certain objects at night. This can be especially that is designed to provide enhanced vision for system assistance driver a is Vision Night BMW concept The BMW Night Vision* damage it. damage a display cleaning cloth; otherwise, you may play with a soft, nonabrasive cloth or with with cloth or nonabrasive a soft, with play Only clean the cover of the Head-Up Dis- < appear brighterand appropriate action. appropriate or other blow horn, take down the stop, or slow to prepared be ahead, of interest object an If the notice you road. from attention remove will the image for long periods while driving, as this glancing atthe rear mirror.not view Do at stare larger animals. The glance should be similar to or people be could objects that notice to play glance the at thermal image on the Control Dis- periodically but active, thebriefly, With system Driving hints factors. other and conditions, weather driver, the of skills recognition visual the objects, nearby other or surroundings, to the compared perature many factors such as theobject size and tem- on depends detection in improvement Any > > > limitations can occur are: image. Some of the situations in which these clear thermal a display and detect to system the limitations thatwill the of reduce mental ability environ- and tophysical operation is subject Night without Vision limitations. operate BMW sophisticated, can nomatter how No system, night. ing at used as a continuous viewing window for driv- is Vision to be notdesigned Night night. BMW The driver is responsible for safe driving at replace forward vision through the windshield. The system is designed to supplement but not limits System when the camera lens is dirty low inherently is contrast the as tunnels, in curves on steep hilltops ordepressions andintight image will be displayed. mode selected, either the normal or full screen play Depending on after a few seconds. the last The image willdisplayedbe the on Control Dis- 2. 1. Activating BMW Night Vision will result. risk asafety otherwise decisions, driving safe headlamps must always be the basis for making illuminated The the uation. by forward view dating visibilitythe conditions and the traffic sit- ment for driver responsibility or for accommo- or replace- asubstitute not is Vision Night BMW accordingly. adjust and hazards speedin manner and that a recognizes potential a to drive at responsibility driver's the be always It not here. will factors mentioned other fog, and camera lens, adverse weather like snow, rain or dirt objects, detected or onthe contamination driver, the size and relative temperature of the > > > > > With low beams switched on: to page Turn the toposition light switch mal system adjustment. system mal nor- during freezes briefly image the when etc. exhausts car transformers, when displaying very hotobjects such as in dense fog, heavy rain or snowfall can be limited by thedriving style ofthe BMW NightVision's potential benefits on on the steering wheel, refer topage Press one the of programmable buttons button may differ somewhat. vehicle's equipment, the location of the button. onthe Depending Press the < 102 . 99 2 or 3 , refer 55 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technology for comfort, convenience and safety on. Display is only shown when the low beams are dark, thermal image Control the onthe when km/hand mph/5 speed ofmorethan 3 approx. ata To prevent withoutdriving headlamps, ofaproblem. indication an not and normal is This asecond. of fractions for intervals certain at isdisplayed image still a system's theDue to adjust needto periodically, 2. 1. 3. page iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to Selecting settings > > > > Deactivating BMW Night Vision items. controller the todisplay thePress menu Night BMW Vision. Activate > ler: Select thepress item menu and the control- rs h button. toSelecting settings. iDrive, refer Via the Press Press the button on the steering wheel. button. the Press 16 Deactivate BMW Night Night BMW Vision. Deactivate off": Vision "Night . 100 remove any debris, ice or snow. To avoid dam- avoidany snow.To debris,remove iceor weather conditions. When doing so, cautiously clean the camera lens manually under severe cally heated. However, it may be necessary to minimizeTo icing,thelens cameraautomati- is Control Display may become gray. When this occurs, the displayed image on the lens. onthe ice or snow fog,dirt, rain and heavy The function of the camera may be affected by Cleaning camera prx seconds. 5 approx. after disappear automatically will image The To exit the menu: currently in use. control the remote for are stored settings The "Zoom" cannotselected. be "Full screen" activated, "Curve mode" and > > > > > the "Zoom" function switched on. With function on.With switched "Zoom" the canonly activated mode" be with "Curve adjusted. The brightness of the screen can be "Brightness": adjusted. The contrastscreenbe thecan of "Contrast": trol Display. The image is shown on the entire Con- screen": "Full degree. the ofthe follow tosome course road sections image the parameters, other Depending on thesteering angle and mode": "Curve in. higherAt speeds, imagezoomed is the "Zoom": < > > A warning will be canceled: speed is reached. is until thatthe stating not active this system will appear amessage km/h, mph/70 40 approx. aspeed of theIf youbelow activate system > lanewarning* Leaving topage Refer aswell. sprayed automatically is area lens the camera on, lamps theWhen windshield is cleaned with the head- lens. instruments to clean ice, snow, or dirt off the or sharp abrasive donotuse tothe age lens, > Press the button on the steering wheel. on/off Switching roads and freeways. It is best to use the system on well-developed before leaving thelane. The system does not warn you if you signal steering wheel. lines. You feelthis due a to slightvibration of the limit lane with roads on in currently are you lane km/hwhenthe vehicle is leaving the mph/70 40 approx. of aspeed from you warns system This concept The if you return to laneyour after 3 secondsapprox. warns accordingly. and km/h mph/70 ofapprox. 40 speed or lane one from lines detected two limit a arrows The two activated. The two linesThe two 1 indicate that the system is is indicate system thatthe 2 mean that the system has has system that the mean 64 . > > > > > > > > > following example situations: function may The ofthe limitedbe in system the cle. otherwise youcould loose control of the vehi- as severity, unnecessary with wheel steering If the systemissues warning, a domove not the ofthe the determining road. course System limits System > > < area of the inside rearview mirror covered etc. with stickers, vignettes in the when the windshield is fogged up, dirty or with bright counter light ahead ing when driving up close behind a vehicle driv- lineswhen limit are objects covered by when limit lines are notwhite in tight curves or on narrow roads dirt or a great deal of water ice, snow, by covered are lines limit when unclear, e.g. in road construction areas or apart thatrunlines are or together with worn-away, poorly visible limitlines, or snowfall or rain fog, heavy in if you signal you if if youbrake heavily a substitute for your personal judgment in judgment in personal your for a substitute as serve cannot warning lane leaving The 101

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Lamps Parking lamps/low beams Lamps in position The low lightbeams up when the light switch is beamsLow page to refer side, ontheswitch lamps onone roadside parking sible to start the engine. It is preferable to it oftime, otherwise nolonger be may ods pos- parking forlamps parking. vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the In switch position Parking lamps position in is switch light the when off switched cally lighting exterior automati- is off, the switched If you driver's the open withdoor ignition the 3 2 1 0 Head Light ning lamps control, headlamp Automatic daytime run- Low beams and welcome lamps Parking lamps and daytime running lamps Lights off and daytime running lamps not leave them switched on for long them onfor switched peri- not leave The parking lamps drain thebattery. Do 2 or or 2 102 and ignition the is on. 3 . * * , welcome lamps, Adaptive Adaptive lamps, , welcome and high-beam assistant high-beam and 1 104 , the front, rear and side side and rear , the front, . < * * * refer topage canactivateYou daytime running the lamps, illuminated when the low beams are on. low beams manually under these conditions. safety risks,shouldyou alwaysswitch on the cannot detect of hazyfog weather. Toavoid lighting conditions. For example, thesensors toambient on switched response be in should in lamps judgment determining when the switch on the fog lamps. lightscause the to be switched on. can horizon the on low sun the with sky blue A beams. totheover low above, the system then automatically switches Light and in ofcase precipitation. Adaptive Head tions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk response to changes in lightambient condi- offin them onor andswitches beams low In switch position Automatic headlamp control iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for lamps Activating/deactivating welcome If you leave the light switch in position Welcome lamps 4. 3. 2. 1. ing remain illuminated for a brief time. brief a for illuminated remain ing and interior light- parking vehicle, the lamps the when parking the vehicle, then when you unlock troller. con- the press and Tires" / "Vehicle Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press * serve as a substitute for your personal your for asasubstitute serve The automatic headlamp control cannot lighting ambient the conditions when you of independent on remain beams low The is active. The LED next to the symbol is is tothe next symbol The is LED active. 103 . In the situations named . In named situations the 3 , the system activates the activates , the system inciple refer topage < 2 or or 16 3

< . 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 5. iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage tion via iDrive. deactivate func- the or duration the canset You the low beams will come on for abrief period. parking the vehicle and switching offthe lamps, When you activate the headlamp flasher after Pathway lighting 6. press the controller. and isselected "Lighting" until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. con- the press and / Tires" "Vehicle Select controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press press the controller. and isselected "Lighting" until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. Select "Welcome light" and press the con- The welcome lamps are switched on. switched are lamps welcome The 16 . rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. running lamps* Activating/deactivating daytime position tion The daytime running lamps light upin posi- Daytime running lamps* ignition is switched off. rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 8. 7. 6. switched on. switched the controller. press and lamps" running "Daytime Select press the controller. controller until "Lighting" is selected and Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. con- the press and / Tires" "Vehicle Select controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. Pressthe controller the open to menu. start the Open Press the controller to apply the setting. the apply to controller the Press duration. Turn controller the toselect the desired controller. lighting" and the press "Pathway Select 0 , 1 The daytime running lamps are are lamps running daytime The and and 1 , the , the light lamps parking up after the 3 . If the. light Ifswitch remainsin 103

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Lamps Activating Adaptive Head Light headlampfollows course theroad. the of andother light parameters, angle the from the steering the on Depending surface. road the of illumination better thatenables control system headlamp Light avariable is Head Adaptive concept The Adaptive Head Light* be possible to start the tostart possible engine. be long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer down beyond the resistance point, arrow After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or Switching on side of your vehicle when parking: just one upof lightingoption the enjoy also You right* or left lamps, parking Roadside 3 2 1 lamps parking roadside High beams/ position into switch theWith switch ignition vehiclestopped. is the when passenger toward side the points and driving Light is notactive in when Head reverse blinding avoid traffic, Adaptive the oncoming To Roadside parking lamps flasher Headlamp High beams tery. Do not leave them switched on for onfor switched notleave them Do tery. The roadside parking lamps drain the bat- 104 3 , refer topage , refer ed on,turn ed the light < 102 . 3 . e.g. in built-up zones. vehiclesyou,ahead and of sufficiently lit areas, and low beams, reacting to oncoming traffic, high between switches automatically beams Activating system usual. as off and on beams hightheswitch to time any at intervene can you Naturally, ibility. neously providesbestthe youwith possible vis- simulta- forth and and back switching stantly permit. This relieves youofthe burden ofcon- are switched on whenever traffic conditions the that beams high sure makes assistant The the insiderearview mirror controls the process. on front on side of off.Asensor the and beams automatically switchesThis the system high concept The assistant*High-beam point, arrow up tothe resistance lever the direction in opposite press Briefly the Switching off 2. 1. direction. pressthe turn signal inthe lever high-beam With the low beams switched on, briefly page Turn lightthe switch toposition assistant is activated. The system system The activated. is assistant cluster lights upwhen the high-beam instrument the in lamp indicator The 102 . 3 . 3 , refer to , refer to

to do so can pose a safety risk. safety a pose can so to do circumstancesbeams when dictate.so Failure low to switch reason, this For encountered. intervention whenunusual conditions are The system cannot completely replace driver back tolow whenbeams canbesafelybeams toquickly used and switch > > tion: to alimited degree, requiring personal interven- only function may notreact or may system the Below are a few examples of situations in which > > > intervenetime. any at can you requires, situation orthe wish you If beams and low beams high between switching Manually System limits System deer crossings shipping trafficor road, close tothe at and equestrians, horsedrawn vehicles, railroad illumination such pedestrians,as cyclists, inherent poor with users road sensing in precipitation heavy or asfog such tions in extremely unfavorable weather condi- lamp flasher asusual. flasher lamp When the low beams are on, use the head- direction. thepress turn signal inlever the high-beam briefly In system, the order toreactivate up toyou back toswitch beams. to low usual. This deactivates the system and it is beams, simply switch on the high beams as the but beams, low wishyou the touse high on switched has assistant high-beam If the direction. thepress turn signal inlever the high-beam briefly In system, the order toreactivate assistant. high-beam the signal the This lever. turn deactivates beams, just switch on the low beams with low use the to wish you but beams, high the on switched has assistant high-beam If the maximize the amount of time oftime that high amount the maximize The high-beam assistant is designed to traffic approaches. approaches. traffic < 2. 1. iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage Switching off via iDrive visibility andtraffic conditions. laws on high-beam switching or for adapting to state with for complying responsibility driver's The high-beam assistant cannot replace the high beams. the will reactivate system the tonormal, return ing a switch to low beams. When the conditions the above conditions as a vehicle ahead requir- interpret may system In the situations, these > > > > occur: can beams low to switching premature which in situations the of some are Below beams. low require that conditions as situations these periodically interpret may system the side, safe the on be To streetlights. example, highly reflective signs, markers, and actual vehicle head lamps or tail lamps and, for ability theto recognize difference between system's reduce the may conditions that to ject sub- is operation assistant High-beam tations. Moreover, no system can operate without limi- > > > > > rs h otolrt pnte menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press approaching large reflective markers approaching certain traffic signals way lighting andporch lights approaching certain lights, such as drive- signs approaching large and/orhighly reflective cleaner with glass moistened slightly acloth ror with on the side insidefront of rearview mir- the when thesensor is dirty. Clean the sensor theof inside rearview mirror covered with stickers, decals etc. in the area when the windshield is fogged up, dirty or in the low speed range ence of highly reflective signs in poorly illuminated areas and in the pres- oncoming traffichighways divided on cross-traffic, or with partially hidden in tight curves, or crests steep on withdips, 105 16 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Lamps rently in use. in rently settingThe is for stored the controlremote cur- 5. 4. 3. 6. matically when you switch on the fog lamps. high arebeams switched on. The fog lamps are switched off whenever the switched on. clusterment lights upwhen the fog lamps are beams. The green indicator lamp in the instru- or onthe switch lamps lowFirst the parking Fog lamps press the controller. and selected is "Lighting" until controller fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe troller. con- the press and Tires" / "Vehicle Select controller. the press and "Settings" Select the controller. press and assistant" "High-beam Select vated, the low beams will come on come auto- lowon will the beams vated, controlIf the is headlamp automatic acti- High-beamassistant is switched off. 106 < panel lighting to to buttononpage Start/Stop off,refer switched is readiness radio after utes area before the doors. exterior the handles toilluminate door in located are lights LED lamps, courtesy the With Interior lamps the knurled wheel. You cancontrol the lighting intensity byusing Instrument lighting utnfrapo.3seconds. button forapprox. 3 the press continually, off switched remain to are lighting panel sill and lamps courtesy lighting, If the interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry button Press manually Switching interior lamps on and off entry lighting,door courtesy lamps Control of the interior lamps, footwell lamps, vehicle are switched off approx. 15 min- the in lamps all battery, the protect To 1 * . is automatic. 58 . < * and silland You can You them buttons turn onandoffusing The reading lamps are beside the interior lamp: Reading lamps located next to the lamps. the to next located 2

107

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Climate Automatic climate control Climate 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 climate control, residual heat heat utilization control, residual climate offautomatic switching air volume, Manual condensation Defrosting windows andremoving Manual air distribution, driver's side compartment Temperature, left side of passenger Air to footwell Ventilation onpage upper refer body area, Air the to for windows side Air directed toward the windshield and 108 112 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Rear window defroster system ventilation parked-car LED for residual heat utilization and recirculatedmode air automaticAUC recirculated-air control/ Maximum cooling Manual air distribution, frontpassenger side compartment Temperature, right side of passenger manually cooling functionSwitching onandoff AUTO program as much as as possible. much as a way that window condensation is prevented densation sensor controls the program in such acon- time, program. same At the AUTO the with automatically on switched is cooling The ture influences tooutside throughout year.the the for instructions tempera- your adapts It also 2. 1. settings onpage currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile control for remote the stored settings are Most setting options. available onthe information The following sections you find pleasant. that interior temperature an to select need only tions, refer to AUTO program below. you Now tribution and air volume for virtually all condi- The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis- climate congenial A Display. Control the on played for current is air setting The distribution dis- 16 iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage iDrive. via program can You adjustthe ofthe also intensity AUTO is pressed. Controlplayed onthe Display button when the respective setting current The is briefly dis- gram byrepeatedly pre can You the adjust intensity ofthe pro- AUTO IntensityAUTO program of AUTO program mate". button. the Move controller "Cli- leftto the toopen the opens This start menu. the Press please keep clear and unobstructed – sensor temperature interior for grill Air the upperthefootwell. bodyandinthe of direction the in windows, side distribution tothe and windshield air and ofair volume adjustment Theprogram handles AUTO the 29 . ssing the AUTO button. AUTO the ssing contain more detailed 16 . cient time to achieve the set temperature. cient set time toachieve the automatic climate control does nothave suffi- keeps it constant. coolingmaximum or heating capacity, and then the with necessary if ofyear, time ble atany achieves this temperature as quickly as possi- is installed. opened. topis active time the every is automatically it If the convertible program has been selected, increased as the speed increases. topopen. ible In addition, the is air volume control for is optimized driving with convert- the convertible the program, climate automatic vertible program can also be selected. In the When the convertible top is opened, the con- program* Convertible Temperature 4. 3. program is switched on. controller. the press and intensity desired the Select controller. and the press programs" "Automatic Select perature settings in rapid settings perature the succession, When switching between different tem- be greatly enhanced if the wind deflector The effect of the convertibleprogramcan The marked intensity intensity The of automatic marked the < The automatic climate control passenger side. vidually onthe driver's and front Set temperature desired indi-the 109 <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Climate perature. output, outside tem- of the regardless heating In the setting highest activate you maximum the region Adapting temperature in upper body 2. 1. 4. 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for upper body region with iDrive. temperature canalso in adjustthe You the troller. adjust temperature the turningby the con- Select the field by moving the controller and Display. Control the on ting button the the current to Press display set- troller. adjust temperature the turningby the con- Select the field by moving the controller and troller. andpress theSelectsettings" "Vent con- Open "Climate". Open the start menu. 110 inciple refer topage 16 . load ontheload The battery. display same. stays the ventilation is switched off inorder to reduce the airThe quantity is reduced needand if be, the defroster. rear window the of not part are and an antenna as used are wires the vehicle equipment,upper on Depending is rear window the when closed. activated theConvertible: rear windowis only defroster function. cooling the on switch also this, do To Air volume, manual volume, Air Rear window defroster condensation removing and windows Defrosting Selecting program > > > > > driver's and passenger's side: interiorvia various programs, separatelyfor the vehicletheinto route flowing out air the can You Air distribution, manual Individual program footwell and windows side: Driver's Footwell Upper body region andfootwell Upper body region with the AUTO button. with the AUTO automatic formode the air volume turning. You the can reactivate by volume air the adjust can You oftime. amount certain a after automatically off switches defroster window rear The windows. side windshield andfront the tion from Quickly remove ice and condensa- the ControlDisplay. program on is shown respective the desired air distribution of the the Press button repeatedly until effective with manual air distribution. manual with effective The automatic mode for the airvolume remains 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 5 4 Front passenger side: 3 2 1 Driver's side: iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage this stored in program. are Your settings individual program Adjusting airdistribution individually – tion. air adjustthe Turn distribu- controller the to troller. Select the desired field by movingthe con- passenger side is selected. until repeatedly the side front driver's or the Move controller rightto the or left necessary. if side passenger front or driver's the Select right or left side. the on fields the with separately adjusted be The driver's and front passenger side can troller. and con- settings" Selectpress "Vent the "Climate". Open menu. start the Open Air tofootwell Air forthe upper body Air tofootwell Air forthe upper body windows side and windshield the toward directed Air manual airmanual distribution settings. buttoncancels Pressing the AUTO the < 16 . cooling. sary for these vents to beopen for maximum vents for the upper body. It is therefore neces- mode. Themaximum air volume flows out of the mate control switches into recirculating air lowest the At the cli-temperature, automatic 0 cally with theprogram. AUTO cooling functionThe is switched automati- on fog over briefly when the engine is started. Depending on the weather, the windshield may remove them. on tion toquickly window surfaces or the cooling functionThe helps condensa- toavoid running. function is only available when the engine is This setting. tothe according temperature > > following control sequence: the Press torunbutton throughrepeatedly the automatically. shut-off the controls and air outside the in ants vehicle. InAUCmode, a sensor detects pollut- recirculates currently then air the tem within the suspending the supply outsideof air. Thesys- Maximum cooling Maximum off Switching cooling function on and control/recirculated-air mode AutomaticAUC recirculated-air 6 air when airrequired. when by responds blocking the ofoutside supply indetects outside air the and pollutants system the mode: on,AUC LED Right continuously. vehicle into the air flows outside off: LED and thewith engine running. before reheating it as needed needed as it reheating before dehumidifies the incoming air The cooling function cools and ate environment bytemporarily or in immedi- odors the pollutants You can respond to unpleasant eprtr bv prx 32 temperature above approx. outside an at possible as quickly Maximally cooled air is obtained as 111 7 /

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Climate and the air the distributionand set. canbe higher the interior the temperature, air volume theWith lock ignition or atradio readiness > > > > lowing conditions are met: The function can be switched on when the fol- 2. 1. inside the vehicle deteriorates continuously. air quality asthe oftime, period alonger over used be not should mode recirculated-air The increase the air volume if necessary. and mode recirculated-air the off switch > button of the automatic climate automatic button ofthe control. any pressing by again system the on switch You 2. 1. and off on Switching automatic climate control Residual heat 25 at an outside temperature below 77 below temperature at anoutside voltage battery sufficient engine at operating temperature engine after switching offthe up to15 minutes Turn right,to the refer toarrow. Switch off the engine. off continuously. air into vehicle ofoutside the supply is shut Left LED on, recirculated-air mode: the again. turn leftto second, the approx. 1 After Turn to the left to minimum air volume. lated-air mode, press the AUTO button or buttonor AUTO the press lated-air mode, recircu-the in up fog windows the Should 6 112 school topick upachild. partment, e.g. while ata stopped used to heat the passenger com- The heat stored in the engine is 7 / < apulted outwards and cause injuries. has become too becomehas too warm, etc. air in your direction, for instance, if the interior the todirect vent ofcool the outlets Adjust flow Ventilation for cooling 2 1 Ventilation outside temperature. any at mode parked-car the in use to ready is It peratures. tem- interior tolower compartment passenger The parked car ventilation blows air into the concept The ventilation car Parked on the Control Display, refer to page shown information detailed more have can You scheduledpart your of maintenance.dard center replaces this combined filter as a stan- from outside air.the eous pollutants Your BMW additional provides prot air. incoming the The filteractivated-charcoal The microfilter removes dust and pollen from Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter you and is notdirected straight at you. past air flows sothatthe the outlets Set vent Draft-free ventilation Levers for changing the airflow direction outletsclosing vent Knurled wheels for smoothly opening and vent outlets; otherwise,vent they could cat- be the any into notdrop objects foreign Do ection ection by filtering gas- < 77 . climate control flashes. display onthe ofthe symbol automatic The 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. via iDrive. The parked car ventilation system is operated please open the vent outlets. vent outlets in the instrument panel. Therefore, The air emergesthe through upper bodyregion between uses. operation normal in recharged be to battery the allowing without succession in twice it vating electrical current, you should refrain from acti- Since the system uses a substantial amount of minutes. switched on for 30 It offdirectly. onand remains switched parked car to start. The system the for times different two set can You iDrive, foroperating principle refer topage Switchingand ondirectly off The parked car ventilation is switched on. the controller. press and car ventilation" "Parked Select the controller. press and ventilation" "Automatic Select controller. Select "Parkedcaroperation" and press the mate". the Move controller "Cli- leftto the toopen menu. start the Open ventilation canalso be 16 . 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Preselecting activation times last adjustment, the time is is the stored. time adjustment, last the the adjustments. After Make remaining The next adjustment is selected. setting. the apply to controller the Press adjustment. the make controller to the Turn The time setting first selected. is controller. the press and time theSelect 2". "Timer or 1" "Timer select the Move controller left rightto the or to troller. Select "Activation time" and press the con- controller. the press and operation" car "Parked Select mate". the Move controller "Cli- leftto the toopen menu. start the Open 113

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Climate 24 hours. Please hours. reactivated it this after time. 24 ventilation has switched on. climate control flashes when the parked car display automatic the on symbol ofthe The climate control lights up. display automatic the on symbol ofthe The troller. "Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and then press the con- controller the tothe Move left rightor toselect Activating timer The switch-on time time is activated. switch-on The able for within for subsequent able activation the The parked car ventilation is only avail- 114 < Johnson Controls, Inc. Controls, Johnson HomeLink is a registered trademark of www.homelink.com. www.bmwusa.com or at: onthe Internet provided also is Information 1-800-355-3515. control. remote universal that is it assume with the compatible integrated ory buttons ory ofthe onone can be three mem- programmed transmitter signal ofanoriginal hand-held The transmitters. held original from hand- the signals andstores ters The integrated universal remote control regis- such as garage andgateor lighting systems. accessories, remote-controlled various for ters transmit- hand-held as three asmany replace The integrated universal remote control can concept The control* Integrated universal remote Practical interi Checking compatibility memory button question. The LED transmitter. safety precautions of originalthe hand-held range of the device. Also, comply with the are objects within or travel the ple, animals the immediate area make to certain thatno peo- grated universal remote control, always inspect refer to page security, own your for beforehand programs If yousell yourvehicledelete one day,the saved mission of the signal. contact your BMWcenter orcall: If you please additional questions, have before programming or using the inte- To prevent possible damageorinjury, inal hand-held transmitter, itinal to hand-held safe transmitter, is inor the supplied manual with the orig- If you see this symbol on the packaging < 1 116 . After this, the programmed this, programmed the . After 1 . will operate the system in 2 flashes to confirm trans- toconfirm flashes < or accessories or 2. 1. Fixed-code hand-held transmitters 2 1 Programming 3. 4. The corresponding button memory 5. running or whenthe ignition is switched on. You can operate the device when the engine is hand-held transmitter. original the of signal the with programmed and right-hand memory button right-hand memory and using the the time: press for When left first page to refer ignition, on Switch LED buttons Memory 20 seconds until the LED the until seconds 20 30 cm from the memory buttons the cm from memory 30 in/ to 12 cm in/10 distance4 approx. of Hold the original hand-held at transmitter a All stored programs are deleted. ory buttons desired memorybutton the hand-heldoriginal transmitter and the Simultaneously press the transmit key on used. transmitter hand-held original of the system mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4. other originalTo program hand-held trans- onds, alter thedistance and repeat thestep. sec- 15 approx. rapidly after notflash does LED The control. remote universal rapidly, release bothbuttons. If the LED slowly at astheslowly first. LED As soon < hand-held andthe transmitter mem- The required distancebetweenthe 1 depends on the particular the depends on 115 1 on the integrated integrated onthe 2 flashes quickly. quickly. flashes 1 1 for approx. approx. for 58 1 is now now is 2 2 . . flashes flashes flashes flashes 2

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Practical interior accessories ory buttons ory alternating-codean system, program the mem- of In the case system. an alternating-code uses original indicates that hand-heldthe transmitter lit 2seconds, this for remains approx. then and time rapidly control flashes ashort for remote control. If theLED button ter or hold down the programmed memory instructions for the original hand-held transmit- nating-code system. To do so, either read the an alter- uses hand-held transmitter original the hand-held transmitters. the following supplementary instructions: please observe analternating code, employ that hand-held programming transmitters When tion. there onthetion possibilities for synchroniza- tobe will equipment set. You the find informa- control, consult the operating instructions for the universalTo remote program integrated transmitters Alternating-code hand-held The corresponding memory button 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. hand-held transmitter. with the ofthe signal programmed original three times. control integrated remote universal the of Press the programmed memory button approx. 30 seconds for step 5. have 4,you tobe step equipment set. After button the receiverPress the oftheon device tobeset, e.g. onthedrive unit. the buttononthe Locate receiver ofthe hand-held transmitters. control as described above in Fixed-code the universal Program integrated remote remote-controlled equipment. yourPark vehicle the within ofthe range repeated programming,whether check If the fails device evento after function a secondperson. Programming will beeasier with the aid of please contact your BMWcenter. questions, additional any you If have 1 of the integrated universal remote 1 116 as described at Alternating-code atAlternating-code described as 2 on integratedthe universal < < 1 is now < 1

2. 1. Rememorizing individual programs Programs cannot bedeleted individually. deleted.All are programs stored LED until the seconds 20 approx. for left the andright-hand button Press memory Deleting all stored programs use. close the glove compartment immediately after on. come lamps the and automatically opens button.The compartment the glove Press Opening Glove compartment 3. Press the desired button the Press memory buttons memory the from away cm to30 10 approx. Hold the original handheld remote control ory buttons ory If the LED integrated universal remote. used. hand-held transmitter original ofthe system as the LED as originalthe As hand-heldsoon transmitter. of button command the press seconds, 20 buttons. If the LED the If buttons. and repeat the step. distance the alter seconds, 15 approx. after < dent while the vehicle is being driven, To prevent injury in the event of an acci- < hand-held transmitter and the andthe hand-held transmitter mem- The required distance between the 1 . 2 2 flashes slowly after approx. approx. after slowly flashes 1 flashes rapidly, release both depends onthe particular 2 does notflash rapidly 2 1 flashes. flashes. of the ofthe 1

overcharging and damage. to comply with this precautioncould lead to needed. Remove the flashlight from the socket when The flashlight can remain there continuously. compartment. glove flashlightThe leftlocated isside the the of on Rechargeable flashlight* Raise lidthe into closed the position. Closing ing cradle partment can be equipped with acorrespond- Depending on the version, the storage com- upward. folded Pull the left button.The andcan opens cover be To open the cover: topage function, refer can also belocked separately using the hotel and system locking central the into integrated is compartment This seats. front the between rest located is in arm- the compartment A storage Center armrest when it is insertedwhen it itsinto socket. Failure Be sure thatthe flashlight is switched off * for the telephone ormobile phone. 33 . < the lockthe the for hotel function, topage refer lock it in the desired position. Move the armrest upward or downward and Pull the right button: center canbe The two armrest set in positions. Adjusting height speakers, refer to page loud- vehicle via the play and the sound player, for example, connect a CDplayer or an MP3 You located thecan, in storage compartment. A connection for an external audio device is forConnection external audio device as well as in the front center center well the front as console in as in doors are the provided compartments Other compartments andOther nets cup the contains holder compartment The To open, raise the cover at the left or right edge. armrest Storage compartmentcenter behind compartment passenger Storage compartmentsthe in compartments Storage 178 117 * .

and 33 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Practical interior accessories edged items in the nets. front seats and in the passenger footwell and the passenger in seats front the of backrests on the located are nets Storage Ticket pockets are located inthe sun visors. damage can result. can damage containers into thecup holders, otherwise as event of an accident. Do not force unsuitable erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the > > luggage compartment: in options the the storage have following You compartment luggage in the compartments Storage Cup holders vers. occupants during braking orevasive maneu- so,If youdo cause theycould personal injury to the hooks. on objects nothangheavy Do vision. down,pressTo fold atthe topedge. clothes hooks Coupe: Net at the loading lip for smaller items. ature. liter- vehicle the accommodating for desire, panel, which is also suitable, if you so in the right side compartment trim Storage < accident, donotstow or hard sharp- To prevent the risk of injury during an and do not transport hot beverages. hotbeverages. donottransport Oth- and lightweight,Use unbreakable containers ensure that it will not obstruct the thatit notobstruct driver's will ensure hangingWhen clothing onthe hooks, 118 < < * . removal. refer the point, lifts to ashtray arrow: up for Press the opened cover beyond the resistance Emptying cover. strip trim ofthe the Press Opening Ashtray the side of the center console. The removable cup holder can beinserted into one. contains abuilt-in cup holder and a removable The compartment of the rear center console Cigarette lighter Fold open the cover. tothe socket: Access frontIn passenger footwell sizes. by insertingsocketorof different plugs shapes Avoid V. the damaging at12 W approx. 200 cleaners, etc., ratingswith ofupto power power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum a as used can be lightercigarette socketthe on, ignition running the switched or engine the With Socket Connecting electrical devices example, usethe lighter burnthemselves. and leave the vehicle; otherwise,childrencould, for you control along take the Always when remote burns. in result could areas other back out. The lighter canbe removed soon as itas pops ignitionthe on. switched inPress lighter the with the engine running or the knob only. Holding or touching it in Hold touchtheor hotcigarette bylighter < edges so that no damage occurs. damage no sothat edges sharpskis clean Only stow Wrap intheski bag. reverse order. To stow the ski bag, performthe above steps in 4. 3. 2. 1. Loading long. m 2.10 ft/ 6.9 upto skis stow bag to the ski canuse You board. snow- one skis pairsor ofstandard up totwo The ski bagpermits safe andclean transport of Ski bag* holder tosecure itholder panel. tothe rear Open the loading flap and use the magnetic ment. the Press button in luggagethe compart- and items facilitates drying ofthe ski bag. The zipper gives you easy access to stowed Extend the theski bagbetween front seats. filler element forward. andpull the Press button downward the 119

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Practical interior accessories Securing cargo Securing ment back into place. Make sure that you do not not do you that sure damage the Make rear seat upholstery. place. into back ment the bottom into the strip press and the filler ele- insert the To therefit tabs at filler two element, duringpants braking or evasive maneuvers. buckle. tents. To do so, tighten retainingthe belt atthe After loading, secure theski bag and its con- do so, it could endanger vehicle occu- to fail you If way. this in bag ski the Secure 120 < 121

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance

Driving tips

This section is designed to provide you with extra support by supplying information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions. Things to remember when driving ing section. careful devote tothethat you attention follow- throughout extended an servicelife, werequest ofoperation economy optimized to provide another. Toensure that your vehicle continues toadjustone need time parts Moving Breaking-in whendriving remember Things to engage the clutch gently. period, break-in this During km. miles/500 300 driven ofapprox. after a distance level mized functionThe clutch ofthe is only opti- atits Clutch this break-in period. and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during and wearcontact patterns pads betweenbrake to achieve km optimized miles/500 approx. 300 of period break-in initial an require Brakes system Brake km. miles/300 200 first period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the break-in initial an after until potential tion manufacture, tires doachieve not their fulltrac- with their totechnical associated factors Due Tires increased. engine vehicle and The can speed gradually be km miles/2,000 From 1,200 initial miles. transmission's kick-down modeduring these Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the km/h. 160 mph/ however do not exceed 4,500 rpmor 100 Drive at changing engine and driving speeds, km miles/2,000 Up to1,200 limits. speed all official obey Always differential and Engine 124 Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Removing unnecessarycargo sumption and environmental impact. can have a positive influence onyour fuel con- you maintenance, regular and style, driving your onvarious factors.Through a few simple steps, The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends Saving fuel after subsequent driving operation. be replacedmust above mentioned ponents Observe the break-in instructions again if com- Following part replacement engine to reach its operating temperature. This is way speed. the fastest for the cold Instead, begin todrive at a moderate engine stationary. remains vehicle the while running Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it immediately off Driving fuel consumption andtire wear. the rolling resistance and thus increases the An insufficient tire inflation pressure increases trips. needed at least twice a month and before long correctCheck and the tire inflation pressure as regularly pressures tireinflationChecking the fuel consumption. wise increase the drag coefficient and therefore like- or sunroof windows open glass open An Closing windowsandsunroof glass the increase the fuel consumption. vehicleto the impede the and aerodynamics luggage racks after use. Add-onparts attached or roof rear auxiliary mirrors, unneeded Remove Removingparts add-on afteruse reduces fuel consumption andminimizes wear. speed engine low a at driving general: In maintainingconstanta vehicle a speed. with the lowest possible engine speed while shift into highest the possible gear anddrive When you have reached thedesired speed, next gearearly. the into shift soand doing in speeds engine rapidly in 2nd gear and above. Avoid high only for off.Accelerate gear starting 1st Use Avoiding high engine speeds sumption. drivingand smooth style reduces fuel con- the from frontvehicle Ananticipatory in ofyou. distance appropriate the maintain so, do To braking. and acceleration unnecessary Avoid driving ahead when Thinking they are not really needed. functions toswitch offwhen these idea good it reason, a is this For gooperation. & stop and ence is particularly pronounced in city traffic energy and require additional fuel. Their influ- ing, rearor windowdefrosting consume alotof Functions such airas conditioning, heat- seat required not currently functions off Switching savings. fuel in results seconds 4 approx. offfor switched the Even engine having jams. or in crossings, traffic railroad signals, traffic Switch off the engine at longer stops such as stops Switching off engine during longer The flow of fuel is interrupted when coasting. vehicle toroll in theappropriate gear. steepOn roadways, let off the gas and allow the highest possiblegear. vehicle and allow the tocoast in to a the stop When approaching ared light, let offthe gas Taking advantage ofcoasting 2. 1. gage compartmentlid open: If it is absolutely necessary drive to with the lug- ment. compart- into can penetrate passenger the complete loss the loss of contactbetween and tires complete apartial is characterized planing, or by and toashydro- referred is This face. phenomenon sur- tires androad between of water form can pipes. Otherwise there is a risk of burns. injury. nottouch personal tail Do hot exhaust well as riskas the ofserious damage property and fire,it withto a lead couldetc. Suchcontact flammable materialsashay, such leaves, grass, highly any and system hotexhaust the between parking, takecare to avoid possible contact them. When driving, standing at idle and while toit,adjacent andnever apply undercoating to the notremove Do shields heat tem. installed Closing luggagecompartment lid notes driving General topage refer system, maintenance pay tothe attention please BMW maintenance performed by of your vehicle. recommends BMW having the achieve the optimum economy and service life Have the vehicle serviced regularly in order to done maintenance Having Hydroplaning systemHot exhaust page to refer level, high a to control mate Increase the air of thevolume automatic cli- dows. Convertible: top,close with closed all win- sunroof. closeCoupe: andthe bothwindows glass < lid completely closed, otherwise exhaust drive with luggageOnly compartment the reduce road speed. If you donot, a wedge driving or roads, When onwet slushy atures are generated in the exhaust sys- inAs all vehicles, extremely high temper- 110 . 221 125 . a BMW center. Also Also center. aBMW <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Things to remember when driving mum tire tread on page toMini- refer also decreases, tires ofthe depth The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread ability to steer and brake the vehicle. your undermining ultimately surface, road the wear will result. use thehandbrake. Otherwise, greater clutch damaged. be transmission may cle's engine, the electrical systems and the walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehi- Driving through water through Driving when you needit. full that braking efficiency will then be available to ensure rotors and pads the dry helps process ger other road users. Theheatgenerated in this endan- not does maneuver that this ensure to pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions ideaa toapplygood light pressure tothebrake drivingWhenon wet roads or inheavy rain, itis Driving inconditions wet failure. even brake possibly and wear brake pedal pressure canlead tohigh temperatures, the driver that ABS is in its active mode. sounds thefrom hydraulic circuits to indicate to with pedal atthe combines brake Pulsation effort. steering possible obstacles with a minimum of still avoid can you responsiveness, steering brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains to best is it it, require that situations In feature. standard a as ABS with equipped is BMW Your Braking safely Using handbrakeon inclines place for time by along place the riding clutch; inclines,On do not hold the vehicle in ft/30 cm, and then only at isthan deeper 1 drive through it if road not onthe Do water brake pedal. Evenlight but consistent on the restingwith foot your not drive Do 126 < 213 . < < < of of the pedals and impair their operation. ofmovement the area into objects to protrude other any or carpets mats, floor allow Never support ofthebraking force andsteering. wise there will be no engine braking actionor sion, refer topage refer sion, transmis- ofthe automatic mode sport manual system.For information on downshiftingthe in ontheloads brake avoid excessive placing you into gear. down first This strategyway helps increased bydownshifting, if necessary all the The braking effect of the engine can be further even brake failure. possibly and wear brake high temperatures, tent pressure on the brake pedal can lead to steep downhill stretches. Even light but consis- tions are needed when descending long or applica- brake minimal only which in gear a to Hills the vehicle are therefore normal. the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under control during operation, and then exits under theforms in Condensation climate automatic parked is vehicle When cure. effect that evenextended applicationwill failto will brakes with torespond apulsatingtend the rotors, brake the on form corrosion Should not reached. during brake applications toclean the rotors is pressure which must be exerted by the pads Thisminimumoccurs because brake pads. the while accumulaterotors, onthecontaminants increased tendency for corrosion to form on brake applications are less frequent, there is an where atall, in conditions and used operating during extended periods when the vehicle is not When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, Corrosionbrake on rotors idle or with the engine switched off,other- or switched the idle with engine notdriveDo with the clutch depressed, in efficiency of the brake system, downshift To prevent overheating and thus reduced < 61 . < 2. aged. can assume the form of a sudden blow-out. ofasudden the form assume can inside ultimate tires. The develops result the damage which at rate the increases and heating load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over- mission in neutral. Also refer to page to refer Also neutral. in mission The engine can beswitched off with the trans- Insert the control remote the ignition into lock. Sport automatictransmission for your vehicle brochure. nance ofyour BMWis contained in theCaring General information on the care and mainte- wash. car automatic an entering before hand from being damaged,always fold themin by exterior onthis vehicle the To prevent mirrors Before driving into a car wash 1. Determining loadinglimit Cargo loading ditions may result. may ditions may be anddamaged unstable driving con- kg, as otherwise the vehicle lbs. or YYY XXX your vehicle. driver andpassengers that will be riding in ofthe weight combined the Determine vehicle's placard vehicle's Locate the following statement on your < bay; otherwise the vehicle could be dam- cargo the in leak fluids no that sure Make approved carrying capacity, never over- loadingTo avoid tires the beyond their and cargo should never exceed weightoccupantsThe combined of * : < 38 . < can be can be transported. ofoccupants, weight occupants and cargo/lu of weight the of total the is load permissible The Load 6. 5. 4. 3. load capacity ofyour vehicle. may reduce the available cargo andluggage how this atrailertransporting todetermine to your vehicle. Consult themanual for transferred trailer be your will from load the If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of 4. step in cargo and luggage load capacity calculated weight may not safely exceed the available and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That Determine the combined weight ofluggage 800lbs. lbs.: 200 minus able cargoandluggage600lbs. loadcapacity is sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail- = 200lbs. pas- 150-lb. be there and lbs. four will 800 For example, if the XXXamount equals capacity.luggage load of cargoand amount The resulting figure equals the available kg. lbs. or YYY and passengers fromXXX Subtract the combinedthe weightdriverof the less cargo/luggage ggage. Thegreater the 127

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Things to remember when driving Never exceed the approved gross vehicle vehicle. ings could come loose oryou could damage the eyes,refer illustration; to otherwise, lash- the lashing the only use lashings, fastening When sary. den braking or evasive maneuvers are neces- ger the vehicle's occupants, for example if sud- > > Stowing cargo > cargo Securing > > supplied with heavy-duty cargo the straps. instructions special the observe Please arrows. to refer straps, used to secure these heavy-duty cargo inare luggage compartment the mounted eyes lashing Four center. BMW your at available are heavier objects and larger Heavy-duty cargo straps cargo. and hold down small andlightweight luggage Use theUse luggage net Cover sharp edges and corners. bulkhead behind therear seats. possible,as placing it directly behind the low as and forward far as cargo heavy Place described above, so that it cannot endan- as cargo the secure and Position 128 * or securing straps to straps securing or * for securing securing for washable and has an anti-skid effect. has anti-skid an and washable is rubberized side The objects. soiled transport can as needed,the useexampleYou for pad to Pad on base of luggage compartment ing or evasive maneuvers. to the vehicle's duringoccupants abruptbrak- they could fly around and pose a safety hazard as inhard theobjects compartment, passenger or heavy unsecured never transport should You laws. safety freeway of safety hazard, and may also put you in violation page to weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer 237 , as excessive loads can pose a pose can loads excessive , as < 129

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance

Navigation

This chapter describes how you can enter destinations and specify your route so that your navigation system guides you reliably to your destination. Starting navigation system Navigation DVD enter. and guide you reliably anyto destination you ascertain the precise position yourof vehicle to satellites canuse system Your navigation system navigation Starting 1. DVD navigation Removing 2. 1. Inserting navigation DVD your center. BMW gation DVD. Thelatest version is available at The navigation system requires a special navi- also shown on the Control onthe shown Control Display. also is message a case this In blocked. is it that sible If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is pos- 2. Press Press button the datafrom DVD. the toscan system forthe seconds several Wait automatically. side up. Thenavigation DVD is pulled in labeled the with DVD navigation the Insert Remove the DVD. drive. the from slightly emerges DVD The 132 1 . 4. 3. 2. 1. tion. visible even if you changetoanother applica- remains display This window. assistance the in You can display the route or the current position window Display in the assistance 3. 2. 1. displayed. briefly is view arrow the direction, of achange suggests system navigation the If Displayingview arrowmap in view* Press the controller. position". Select the desired route view or "Current Other menu items are displayed. Press the controller. window. assistance the Move controller tothe right to enter the selected and press the controller. the press and selected Turn controllerthe until is "Settings" menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press * window. 6. 5. 4. The arrow view appears in the assistance assistance in the appears view The arrow and press the controller. instructions" pop-up display "Arrow Select press the controller. and selected is "Languages" until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the is selected and press the controller. Turn the controller until "Language / Units" 133

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination entry > > shows: Display Control The 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for and other road users. tion, you can endanger the vehicle occupants this Ifyou donotobserve precau- system. tion naviga- the by issued instructions the and tions contradiction between traffic condi- androad ofany the in event traffic regulations applicable > buttons, referbuttons, topage the programmable memory/direct selection on anavigation destination also store can You page to refer guidance, the destination start to ceed After selecting your destination you can pro- > > > > > the followingamong options: In entering your destination you can select from Destination entry ance is switched off switched is ance guid- destination when list destination the guidancetion the arrow view ormapview during destina- ler. the press control- and "Navigation" Select "Navigation". button. controller the Move tothe right tocall up This opens the start menu. the Press Selecting home address, refer topage refer to page Selecting destinationfrom addressbook, Destination list,page Selecting destination from list,a refer to refer to page Selecting destination using information, page Entering destination via voice*, refer to below see manually, adestination Entering 146 tionary, and always give give always tionary, priorityand tothe dataonlyvehiclethe when Enter is sta- 137 . 134 142 140 < 21 inciple refer topage . 141 144 16 . > > ing features: follow- the with you supports also system The 3. 2. 1. called upquickly. be can names stored that so automatically entry your completes and spellings different enter page to refer towns, easier for you to enter the names of streets or The system's word-matching principle it makes manually destinationEntering a for your new destination. city if the current entries are being retained canskipYou entry ofcountry the andtown/ city. or town a of area downtown the to you guide If you do not enter a street, the system will troller. con- the press and address" "Enter Select Press the controller. "New destination" is selected. press the controller. and selected is "Navigation" until controller toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe 145 . This allows to allows you . This its zip code bemust entered. ance, theat of least town/city destination orthe guid-destination the start to able be to In order 2. 1. Selecting country 3. 2. 1. name Entering destinationtown/city via the controller. Select the country of destination and press display. the on appears countries ofavailable The list country and press the controller. displayed the or Province" / "State Select > > theTo delete entered letter necessary:if Control onthe Display. ter appears starting with let-A list this of all towns/cities ler. Select the letter first the andpress control- city the andpress controller. /City" Select "Town the or town/ displayed eet and press the controller longer. select theMove the controller toward right to and press the controller. Delete all letters: digits or select theMove the controller toward right to Delete individual numbers letters: or 2. 1. code zip Entering town/cityof destinationvia 5. 4. controller. Select the individual digits and press the Enter zip the code: ler. control- /City" the Select "Town press and the controller. city name is selected from the listand press essary. Turn the controller until the town/ totheChange third field from topif the nec- > enter newyou letter. a The list gradually grows smaller eachtime Enter if letters additional necessary. troller. symbol and press the con- Select the if necessary: ablank space Enter 135

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination entry 4. 3. 2. 1. Entering street and intersection tion or the house number. intersec- enter the canalso you street the After intersection and number house street, Entering the street. the intersectionThe in is entered way the as same troller. destination is selected and press the con- Turn controllerthe until the town/city of into Change thirdthe field the from top. is displayed. The corresponding town/city of destination Select thezip codean > > > way as the town/city of destination. of town/city the as way The street is entered in exactly the same Enter the street. press the controller. Select "Street" or the displayed street and eet and press the controller longer. select theMove controller the toward right to and press the controller. letters: or digits all Delete select theMove controller the toward right to Delete individual digits letters: or troller. symbol and press the con- Select the space: Enter ablank 136 d press the controller. 3. 2. 1. town/city. the of part another belongs to it town/city of destination, because, for example, notexist in street desired does the entered undo this entry. This practical be may the if can you been entered, already has atown/city If name. related town/city is the after displayed street entered country are offered for selection. The destination. In this case all streets of the a astreet canalso without enter entering You town/city of destination Entering a street without entering enter the street. top and thefrom field the second to Change try appears and press thecontroller. requestthe for street entry a of inthe coun- Turn controllerthe tothe right until the selected. is arrow The Change toupper field. 3. 2. 1. navigation DVD can be entered. All house numbers stored for the street on the number house Entering pose if necessary. if pose function the command thisvate for voice pur- Reacti- time. any at iDrive and command voice destination, it is possible tochangebetween voice system. command When enteringthe You can enter a desired destination via the voice* Entering destination via > > manual destination entry Starting destination guidance with is selected and press the controller. Turn the controller until the house number into thirdChange the the field from top. controller. Select the individual digits and press the number:Enter house the troller. Select "House number" and press the con- list, refer topage list, refer The destinationis stored destinationin the the controller. press and list" todestination "Add Select immediately: started be to not is guidance destination If Destination guidance starts immediately. troller. con- the press and guidance" "Start Select commands read aloud. read commands With { Options } youcan have thepossible 141 . < the language of the voice command system. the Say of countryname the ofdestination in 1. Selecting country pauses. exce volume, avoiding and Pronounce letters smoothly the at normal destination. using the customary spelling of the country of town/city spell it the To enter of destination, Spelling town/city of destination word. asanentire entered The town/city of destination can be spelled or Entering town/cityof destination 1. destination. for country of toask the for system Wait the Control Display. entriesthe are displayed once on at 6 to Up ies of thatmatch yourdestination entries. towns/cit- to20 up suggest can system The rs h button thesteering on wheel. Press the 1. 2. 2. tem recognizestem town/city. the youters the say, more exactly the sys- let- more The destination. of town/city atleast firstSay ofthethe letters three Spell town/city name: tion. of destina- countrythe of name the Say { Enter address ssive emphasis and and emphasis ssive } 137

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination entry nation is selected and press the controller. theTurn controller until the town/city ofdesti- via iDrive: The town/city can also beselected from the list 1. excessiveemphasis pauses. and Speak smoothly and atnormal volume, avoiding English. as an entire word, the system language must be destination of UStown/city a toenter Example: word. entire an as entered be can spoken is system command the thein region of the where language voice located streets and destination of Towns/cities word* Entering the destination as an entire ies ofdestinationies your thatmatch entries. to6towns/cit- up suggest can system The of destination. to request town/city the system the for Wait 2. 2. system. the by suggested is destination A nation. the name ofdesti- town/city the Say of > > > > > Select atown/city: To respell town/city: the { ofthe list: entries additional Display Select entry, e.g. Select other town/city: town/city: other Select Select highlighted town/city: town/city: highlighted Select 138 Next page Next } { Entry 3 { No { Repeat } } { Yes } } Destination guidance starts immediately. guidance starts Destination Starting destination guidance Say thehouse number as individual digits. canbe numbers house Up to entered. 4-digit number:house enter the To town/city of destination. The street is entered in the same way as the Entering street and house number select select city/town desired the this in list. Select this entry with dots. three by followed destination a as shown and list separate a in summarized are nation is selected and press the controller. theTurn controller until the town/city ofdesti- via iDrive: The town/city can also beselected from the list { 2. 1. 3. system. the by suggested is destination A Start guidance Start cannot be differentiated by the system differentiated by cannot be system the which same the sound that Destinations Say the house number. { > > > > > Select atown/city: House number spelling it: by Enter ofdestination town/city Reenter the town/city: town/city: the Reenter Select entry, e.g. Select other town/city: town/city: other Select Select highlighted town/city: town/city: highlighted Select } { { Yes Spell } } ifnecessary. Then } { Entry 3 { { Repeat No } } < { Yes } } selection Map-guided destination or can be stored in the address book. list destination the to added is destination The destination Saving 2. 1. adoptitthen into guidance. destination the destination select and map cursor the onthe to destination by using map.Youa canuse the street of the destination, then you can input the town/city or the of location the know only If you 3. Press the controller. "New destination" is selected. ler. control- the press and "Navigation" Select > trol Display: Con- the on displayed is map a of section A Select "Input andpressmap" the controller. { { Add to address book address to Add Add to destinationlist to Add current destination current During destination guidance, around the } } or 7. 6. 5. 4. Press the controller. > > > > > Select the desired menu item: other menuitems are displayed. The selected town/city of destination and tem. sys- guidance destination the in destination Pressthe controller or accept to store the > > cursor. the with destination a Select > "Input map". tomap""Return changes back tothe map. current destination in the center of the the places position" destination "Show position in rent center ofthethe map. "Show current position" places the cur- guidance. destination starts guidance" route "Start right, forward and back. The controller can be moved to the left, corresponding direction. Moving map: move the controller in the Changing scale: turn the controller. entered destination last the around vated, the With destination guidance deacti- Exit the menu. 139

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination entry Select the symbol presscontroller. and the Selectthe up from the map view: forThe map destination input can also becalled 6. 5. 4. 2. 1. into them destinationthe guidance. andadopt hospitals, or sights hotels, e.g. tions, You can obtain a display of selected destina- information Selecting destination using 3. tion. maximum distance from the current loca- Enter search criteria if necessary, e.g. the andpress the controller.taurants", res- and "Hotels e.g. selection, your Make Press the controller. ler. the andpress control- Select "Information" ler. the press control- and "Navigation" Select > > > Select location: "On a new destination" anew "On location" "On destination" "On 140 eette arrow and press the controller. Select the To exit fromthe menu: 9. 8. 7. > > > > Select the desired menuitem: tive navigation DVD. tive navigation ler. control- the press and adestination Select Control Display. These destinations are displayed on the troller. the con- press and search>" " > > > > The selected destinationedited:can be tination controller. list the and press Select the desired destination from the des- This symbol indicates current This symbol the destina- page name, town/city via destination Entering Select "Edit". For operation, refer to Changing entry: ance is switched off. Select "Delete list".Destination guid- Deleting all entries: Select "Delete entry". entry: Deleting ondestination". "Information Select Displaying information on destination: Select toaddress"Add book". Saving entry: 135 . 141

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination entry Select"Address book"press and the controller. pr operating iDrive, for Openingbook address Address book 2. 1. address book. the in destinations 100 approx. store can You Storing destinationsaddress in book page to list book,refer nation in address the You can also store a destination from the desti- 5. 4. 3. troller. Select "New address" and press the controller. Select "Address book" and press thecon- The entry is stored in the address book. the controller. Select "Store in address and book" press page manually, Entering adestination Entername and address, alsorefer to troller. con- the press and address" "Enter Select 141 . 142 inciple refer topage 134 16 . . enter a name. In the by DVD. you thisnavigation case, must book ifaddress you have left the sector covered canalso enter yourYou current in position the 4. 3. 2. 1. address book. currentThe canbe position the into adopted position* current Storing 2. 1. book Selecting destinations from address the controller. Select "Store in address and book" press ally, page ation,refer Entering destination to a manu- The namegiven canbe changed.For oper- and press the controller. Select "Use current location address"as controller. the press and selected Turn the controller until "New address" is into Change thirdthe thefield from top. troller. Select "Address book" and press the con- Select the entry and press the controller. Control Display. The stored entries are displayed on the troller. Select "Address book" and press the con- 134 . ler. control- the press and guidance" "Start Select To start destination guidance: 3. 2. 1. book address from destinations Changing 5. 4. troller. Select "Edit address" and press thecon- Select the the entry andpress controller. troller. con- the press and book" "Address Select the controller. Select "Store in address and press book" page manually, tion operation,For refer destina- Entering to a Change entry. 134 . book Deletingall destinations from address 4. 3. 2. 1. address book Deletingindividual destinations from 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Select "Yes" and press the controller. troller. Select"Deleteaddress" presscon- and the Select the the entry andpress controller. troller. con- the press and book" "Address Select Select "Yes" and press the controller. controller. Select "Delete address book" and press the press the controller. controller until "Delete data" is selected and Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the troller. con- the press and / Tires" "Vehicle Select controller. the andpress Select "Settings" menu. Pressthe controller the open to menu. start the Open 143

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination entry 2. 1. intion address book. the address book. This entry is in the second posi- in the address asahome rent destination your current canstore You or position cur-the Storingaddress home 2. 1. Changing home address 2. 1. Adopting homeas destination address 4. 3. selected and press the controller. the press and selected Turn the controller until "Home address" is into Change thirdthe field the from top. troller. Select "Address book" and press thecon- destination manually, page troller. For operation, refer to Entering a con- address""Edit press the Select and troller. Select "Home address" and press the controller. Select "Start guidance" and press the controller. Select "Home address" and press the con- the controller. Select "Store in address and book" press press the and guidance, controller.nation "Save current destination" during the desti- "UseSelect current location address",as or 144 134 . 3. 2. 1. criteria route Changing rience. expe- on personal based wouldyou choose that ones be same the notalways may system tion result, the routes recommended by the naviga- types are stored on the navigation DVD. a As road The roads. winding or freeways involves it the taking type account,e.g.road into whether The route is planned according tofixed rules, active. is guidance tination entering the destinationwhenever and the des- the route criteria as often as you like when choosing certain route criteria. You can change You can influence the calculated route by Selecting route > > > > Select a route criterion for the route: Display. The various criteria are listed on the Control is selected and press the controller. Turn the controller until"Routepreference" into Change thirdthe thefield from top. ler. the press control- and "Navigation" Select slow progress be progress will slow or ofhow fast Short regardless route, route" "Short roads the fastest nation of the shortest possible route and time,The being acombi- traveling short route" "Fast Freeways are avoided where possible. highways" "Avoid given priority. are arteries traffic major and Freeways "With highways" increase considerably. selected, the calculation the time for can route 2. 1. arrow or map view: The route criteria can also be changed in the arrow presscontroller. and the Selectthe To exit from the menu: 5. 4. troller. Select a route criterion and press the con- press the controller. Select the symbol for the route criterion and > > > terion andthen controller: the press If necessary, select an additional route cri- Press the controller. "Avoid "Avoid tollroads" or"Avoid ferries" are If the route criteria "Avoid highways", Ferries are avoided where possible. ferries" "Avoid Tollroads are avoided where possible. tollroads" "Avoid the traffic obstruction. calculated in a way that passes through traffic obstruction, theroute can also be road type and the kind and extent of the of traffic on obstructions. Depending case in route the of changing Automatic route"* "Dynamic The route criterion is selected. < > > > benefits include: user The response. instant for basis the as DVD navigation the with stored on the entries data ongoing checks, comparing your destination of streets or towns/cities. The system runs names the toenter you it for easier ple to make princi- matching word the supports system The Word matching principle nonexistent names and addresses. and names nonexistent navigationsystem DVD. The will accept not onthe beginning with stored letters thatare The system only accepts name entries identification. ters are available to ensure unambiguous enough automatically as let- soon them as cities streets, and the system will complete When you are entering the names towns/of "Monaco". spelling Italian or the "München" spelling German Instead "Munich", of youcan alsothe enter Example: dard form used in another country. spellingentrycorresponds the of stan- a to the that versions, the official provided from Names of specific towns/cities can also vary 145

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination guidance 3. 2. 1. guidance Starting destination Destination guidance play ofthe direction arrows. of direction by spoken instructions and the dis- ofanecessary change in well advance notified are You time. atany iDrive via equipment other symbol and press the controller. During destination guidance, you can operate Select the the arrow or map view: in started also be can guidance destination The play on the Control Display. guidance is indicated by arrows or dis-a map Afterbeen theroutehas calculated, destination troller. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- topage tination, refer and press the controller or enter a new des- list destination the from destination a Select press the controller. and selected is "Navigation" until controller fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe 146 134 . 1. eette symbol and press the controller. Select the view map or display arrow In terminating/continuing Destination guidance, onwhich the button ... page to refer Also stored. is destination desired the Press buttons selection direct With programmable memory/ In destination list controller. Select the current destination and press the This symbol marks the current destination. current the marks symbol This 22 . 2. 2. 1. Displayingdisplay arrow page ofmenu opening items, to Comfort refer of the route during destination guidance. You have the option of displaying various views Displaying route Select"Yes" presscontroller. and the To start destination guidance immediately: ashort time. after The destination guidance starts automatically guidance todestination?"."Continue the question: see ofthe trip, uponrestarting you last end will notreachedIf the the destination was before troller. Select "Stop guidance" andpress the con- selected and press the controller. is display" "Arrow until controller the Turn intoChange fourth the field from top. the ler. control- the press and "Navigation" Select 18 directly tothe screen last displayed, another you From menu, can change . < the arrow changes. arrow the of appearance the of direction, a change Before Control Display. the lineof bottom or top the in displayed are tion time of arrival andthe tothe distance destina- Depending on the equipment, the estimated 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 > > Direction of travel position Current change directionnext of Distance the to flies crow asthe to destination Arrow Starting/stoppingguidance destination criteria route Selecting Manually displaying traffic information traffic displaying Manually on/off instructions voice Switching The arrow display is displayed. ture. navigation DVD, e.g. in aparking struc- onthe contained anarea located in not is from a bird's eye view when the vehicle Arrow shows the route to becalculated Solid arrow: route. onthe guidance calculated Destination Hollow arrow: 147 *

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination guidance eette arrow and press the controller. Select the To exit fromthe menu: 3 2 1 2. 1. plannedthe route onthe is shown map. After the starting guidance, destination a map. havecurrent yourYou can position displayed on Displaying map view Change of direction Distance tochange ofdirection Street name for change of direction > > > view is selected: Turn controllerthe until the map desired into Change fourth the field from top. the ler. the press control- and "Navigation" Select "Perspective" oftravel" direction "Map north" facing "Map 148 The next map view is displayed. controller. the andpress symbol the corresponding Select Turn the controller to change the scale. scale Changing Changing map view toward points always north. map greater, the or km miles/500 of Atscales oftravel. 250 tion map tonorth the your toward or current direc- option the have of deciding whether toorient you km, miles/500 scalesAt less of than250 arrow and press the controller. Select the To exit fromthe menu: Display. Control the of in line shown the destinationto the are bottom time ofarrival estimated The distanceand the 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3.

Arrow to destination as flies crow as todestination the Arrow Manually displaying traffic information Changing route criteria > > > Changing mapview onpage tion informa- via destination Selecting to refer displayed/hidden, be can selected last tion informa- the which in menu the Displaying Selecting destination using map Starting/stopping destination guidance on/off instructions voice Switching Press the controller. "Map direction of direction travel" "Map "Map facing "Map north" "Perspective" 140 * 2. 1. displayed. are also road individual The distances remaining to be traveled on each route displayed during destination guidance. the along towns and roads can the have You route Displayingtowns/cities streetsandof eette symbol and press the controller. Select the view: can be on switched offin or map arrow or the instructions voice guidance, destination During Switching voice instructions on/off voice instructions via Destination guidance To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press controller.the selected and press the controller. Turn controller the until is list" "Route into thirdChange the the field from top. ler. control- the press and "Navigation" Select rentlyuse in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. time: To switch the voice instructions on/off at any The voice instructions are switched on. switched are instructions voice The press the controller. and instructions" voice "Navigation Select press the controller. and selected is "Languages" until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the selectedis presscontroller. and the Turn the controller until "Language / Units" selected and press the controller. Turn controller the until is "Settings" menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press * . 149

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination guidance > > refer topage wheel you can also make the following settings, steering the on buttons programmable the With instructions cancelingRepeating and voice 2. 1. instruction. The volume can only be adjusted during a voice instructions voice of volume Setting rently in use. in rently settingThe is for stored the controlremote cur- sources. audio This volumeindependent is the of volumeof the Press button longer. button Press Switchvoice instructions on/off: button. the Press Repeat the voice instruction: to select to select volume. desired the Turn the knob during the voice instruction required. if instruction, voice last the Repeat 150 55 : route: theTo withoutexit from changing menu the recalculated. is route The 3. 2. 1. returning tothe original route. before travel to want you that miles/kilometers of number the Enter road. of stretches particular avoid navigation system's route recommendations to the revise can you guidance, destination During sections routeBypassing traffic info list. info traffic information displayed in the map view or in the is active or ance the canhave not, you traffic guid- destination Whether displayed. matically toyour relevant mation planned isroute auto- infor- traffic the guidance, destination During is periodically updated. centersmanagement andthetraffic information trafficThe conditions monitored by are traffic stations. by transmitted radio fic information In many congested areas, Traffic information* Select the arrow and press the controller. number and press the controller. Turn controllerthe toenter the desired controller. the press and selected Turn the controller until "New route" is into Change thirdthe thefield from top. ler. the press control- and "Navigation" Select you can receive traf- 3. 2. 1. information on/off traffic of reception Switching 4. station with station with reception. strongest the Info Traffic ofthe selection automatic "AUTO": displayed. 5. The traffic information can can and received The be traffic information selected and press the controller. Turn controller the until is "Settings" menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press tings" is selected and press the controller. set- Info "Traffic until controller the Turn ler. Select "Traffic Info" and press thecontrol- to the currentto the vehicle position. route is shown sorted according to the distance First trafficthe information the along planned diamond. yellow mation on the planned route is marked with a the traffic infor- guidance, destination During controller. the press and symbol the Select fic information traf- border, with ared is shown is symbol available for the planned route. If the can be displayed in the arrow or map view. traffic information destination guidance, During During destination guidance Manually displayingtraffic information other informationdisplayed. is tion name, frequency, local number or or local number name, frequency, tion Depending on the station, either the sta- 151 <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination guidance 3. 2. 1. With destination guidance switchedoff eette arrow and press the controller. Select the To exit fromthe menu: presscontroller. the Select a traffic information item from the list and Displaying detailed traffic information functionscaleselected. the of dent are displayed and hidden. This occurs as a report as well as the number for the type of inci- The section of the route affected by a traffic km. miles/200 the map view up to a scale of 100 in shown are symbols information traffic The view Depiction oftraffic informationmap in currentto the vehicle position. route is shown sorted according to the distance the First the along traffic information planned ler. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control- "Navigation". controller the Move tothe right tocall up Open the start menu. 152 Symbols fortrafficinformation Accident Uneven surface Icy roads traffic Stopped up back Traffic traffic Slow Road close Smog Cross winds Slippery road Heavy rain Fog No parking Low clearance Danger Vehicle onwrong carriage way load ofhazardous Transport General traffic obstruction Roadwork failure light Traffic displayindividually. these received. Select a smaller scale to Several traffic events have been the direction of travel concerned than 5miles/10km, greater scales with map event Traffic arrow points in shortly before shortly before this. displayed be will junction possible last The e.g. km, length the ofthe traffic congestion. 40 miles/ 25 adistance from ofapprox. mation selected,will youprovided be with certaininfor- tion system and"Dynamic route" is not If atraffic obstruction is reported naviga- to the Displaying trafficobstructions whether or not "Dynamic route" is selected. on depending vary will response System guidance Traffic information during destination Police checkpoint Delay Lane closure travel of directions both in event Traffic Stopped traffic Stop-and-go traffic Slow trafficother or event may leadmay through trafficthe obstruction. trafficof the obstruction, the routecalculated and extent the kindDependingroad typeand on along out traffic original obstructions route. the point not does system The obstruction. traffic will changed be in automatically eventthe of a When "Dynamic route" is selected, the route planning route Dynamic 2. 1. off. switched guidance destination the can You display youralso current withposition Displaying current position Display. called up a different application on the Control have you if displayed also is information This is selectedis presscontroller. and the Turn controller the until "Current position" intoChange fourth the field top. the from ler. control- the press and "Navigation" Select 153

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Destination guidance played on a map, refer to page referto map, a played on the canalso have You position current dis- arrow and press the controller. Select the To exit fromthe menu: appear. city, or yourtown current will coordinates map unable is toidentify a system If the navigation The current position of your BMWis displayed. 154 148 . > > > > > … if do to What to doif… What that is as close as possible tothe original. aspossible asclose is that ters to choose from. Select a destination will let- any notoffer you the case, system thatis the In DVD navigation loaded. this destination on dataofthe The is notstored letters select the your entry? for desired tination butit guidance, is notpossible to des- the for destination a enter to want you guidance. destination the start then etc., station railway asthe such adestination street, Enter or any entered. for can be city or the determined town area navigation nodowntown On the DVD, street name? without the destination the destinationaccept guidancea does not original. the to as possible as is close that destination thatis Selectthe a DVD navigation loaded. destination on dataofthe The is notstored destination? the destinationaccept guidancea does not air. open the in reception guaranteed arule, is tion. As is in the process of calculating your posi- system the or DVD, navigation your on able your is avail- position obstructions, notyet to due position current at your signals GPS The system is unable to receive enough play? vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis- requestyou the current position of your accordingly. labeled DVD for the navigation system.TheDVD is The notbe may right DVD navigation the the ControlDisplay? is request DVD on the toinsert displayed butthe inserted, is a navigation DVD > > again operational. again is once system before the minutes about 10 takes it disconnected, was battery If the entries? to not react does the system navigation route. anew recommended calculate and the system requires a few seconds to Or youhave left the recommended route the general direction of turn, you will see an arrow which indicates a indicating ofanarrow Instead tion DVD. been completely recorded on the naviga- You aredriving in an areathat has not yet tions? intersec- approach as you toturn way which the system stops furnishing directions on 155 yourplanned route.

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance

Entertainment

This chapter describes the operation of the radio and CD player as well as their tone settings. On/off and tone > > > andsettingcontrols options: shared have sources audio following The On/off andtone Two drives:Two One drive: on your vehicle's equipment. The layout of the buttons canvary depending player CD near Buttons > > > The audio sources can be operated using: Controls > CD changer CD player radio Business Professional Buttons on steeringwheel, referpage to iDrive the ofthe playerin area Buttons CD buttons, buttons, refer topage Programmable memory/directselection 158 * * radio or or radio 21 11 Operating viaiDrive > > > > > > > You have the following choices: 2. 1. 5 4 3 2 1 reception, store stat radio: with station the strongest update other adjustments canbe made, e.g.with audio source, depending the "Set": on USB/audio interface "AUX": AUX-In connection CD CD or changer player "CD": "SAT": satelliteradio "WB": Weather Band station "FM" and "AM": radio reception "Entertainment". button. Move the controller backwards to call up This opens the start menu. the Press sample stations. sample Drive for navigation DVDs Drive for audio CDs > > > > on/off,volume output sound Entertainment Eject Eject CD Dchanger. CD track CD and Select player for station. radio Change Turn: adjust volume. played. is CD track most recently selectedradio station or When the system is switched on, the on/off. switch Press: Station scan/track search scan/track Station * ion, tone control, the remote control currently in use. in currently control remote the higher, the selected audio source is stored for the With in position ignition or radio-ready key page ofmenu opening items, to Comfort refer Switching on/off 2. 1. Changing tone settings atthe control remote the used moment. are saved for settings radiothe readiness, From sources. audio The sound settings are globally adjusted for all increase. and bass, or the speed-dependent volume treble e.g. can settings, tone You alter various Tone control control used at the moment is saved. for theremote the setting radio readiness, From Turn knob Adjusting volume Press knob on/off: output sound To switch Entertainment the on the steering wheel, refer to page with buttons the volume the adjust can also You desired volume is set. switchTo doso, the sound output onagain. off. switched ignition the with minutes approx. 20 for available is output sound the drive, single a For off. thatsound switched outputis cates This symbol on the Control Display indi- Display Control the on symbol This rs h otolrt pnte menu. button. Pressthe controller the open to the opens This start menu. the Press 18 directly tothe screen last displayed, another you From menu, can change . < 1 1 next tothe player until CD the next to the CD player. CD the to next 11 . Treble andbass 3. 2. 1. controller. Select"Set""Tone", thenand and press the menu: you have opened "Entertainment" in the start The tone settings canalso beselected when 4. 3. is selected. is Turn the controller until the desired setting or"Bass". "Treble" select the Move controller left rightto the or to and press the controller. controller until "Treble / Bass" is selected Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the Select "Audio" and press the controller. selected and press the controller. Turn controller the until is "Settings" 159

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance On/off and tone 1. increase in volume. speed. You can set various stages for the with increasing volume the increases matically The speed-dependent volume control auto- Speed-dependent volume control > > same manner as "Treble / Bass". canadjustthe distributionYou volume in the Balance and fader 2. troller. Select "Speed volume" and press the con- "Fader": front/rearvolume distribution "Balance": left/right volume distribution changed. The adjustment is applied; the field can be controller:Turn the 160 3. 2. 1. Surround. and Stereo between choose can You high-end soundsystem*Individual 1. ranges. frequency all in acoustics spatial the improves that effect sound aspatial select can You HiFiSystem* Professional LOGIC7 The spatial sound effect is activated. Press the controller. "Surround". or "Stereo" Select controller. the press and Settings" "Surround Select controller. the press and Settings" "Surround Select 2. 1. You can set individual sound frequency ranges: Equalizer* Harman International Group. ofthe acompany Inc., ofLexicon, marks trade LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered Select "Off" and press the controller. sound: spatial off switch To 3. 2. 3. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater". Select "Equalizer" and press the controller. LOGIC7spatial is sound switched on. Press the controller. select the desired frequency range. the Move controller left rightto the or to is selected. is Turn the controller until the desired setting With two drives: select "Yes". select two With drives: 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. settings. tothe settings all default can tone You reset settingsResetting tone press the controller. and selected is "Reset" until controller Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the Select "Audio" and press the controller. selected and press the controller. Turn controller the until is "Settings" menu. Pressthe controller the open to menu. start the Open 161

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Radio Listening toradio wavebands. Your providesradio reception ofthe and AM FM Radio 3. 2. 1. off. the soundoutputis switched the buttonif Press gest signal, refer to page refer to signal, gest received, with station to the theupdate stron- the stations displayed can no longer be if or stations any display not does "Autostore" If sets". "Pre- e.g. criteria, selection various of basis the Stations are shown ontheControl Display on 4. controller until "FM" or "AM" is selected. fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe "Entertainment". button. Move thecontroller backwards tocall up This opens the start menu. the Press Press the controller. 162 164 . Professional* radio displayed. criterion you can have stations In addition tothe stations currently displayed, Turn the controller. Changing stations > > criteria: You can choose from the following selection Business radio > > > > criteria: You can choose from the following selection Stations you have stored, refer topage refer you stored, have Stations "Presets": to page with stations the The refer strongest signal, "Autostore": on manually frequency page displayed, refer tothose tion toSelecting To set stations that can bereceived inaddi- "Manual": topage refer you stored, have Stations "Presets": signals in the"AM" waveband. The stations with the strongest received "Autostore": waveband. "FM" the currentlybe received canStations that in "All stations": 164 . with another selection selection another with 163 . 164 164 . . 2. 1. > > > > criteria: from following can the You selection choose criterion displayed. you canhave stations with another selection In tothe currentlyaddition stations displayed, Changing selection criteria > the steering wheel, refer to page can You change with stations also buttonson tion. sta- displayed tothe next changes system The the buttonfor corresponding direction. the Press Buttons toCDplayer next troller. tion criterion is selected and press the con- Turn controller the until desired the selec- into Change second the thefield from top. manually. frequency Selecting to refer displayed, those to tion addi- in received be can that stations set To "Manual": page Stations youhave previously stored, refer to "Presets": waveband. "AM" the in signals The stations with the strongest received "Autostore": waveband. "FM" the Stations that can currently be received in stations": "All manually. frequency Selecting to refer displayed, those to tion addi- in received be can that stations set To "Manual": 164 . 11 . radio remains on the current station. the and stations, ofthe sampling cancels This 2. 1. To endsampling: sampled. are stations The 3. 2. 1. band. stationseach thefrom of current the on wave- The system automatically plays a brief sample Sampling stations, scan 3. 2. 1. received in addition thoseto displayed. are that stations select can you "Manual" With manually frequency Selecting scanning,To stop press thebutton again. the hold and press stations, the sample To Buttons toCDplayer next Select "Scan" and press the controller. Press the controller. Select "Scan" and press the controller. displayed. are items menu Other Press the controller. "Set"selected. is ler. Select "FM" or "AM" and press thecontrol- Select "Manual" and press the controller. the press and "Manual" Select into Change second the thefield from top. ler. Select "FM" or "AM" and press thecontrol- buttonfor thecorresponding direction. 163

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Radio 4. 3. 2. 1. reception signal. with best the ofstations list the canupdate you set, originally stations the of range transmission the you If and onalonger journey are leave ness: Busi- and Radio Professional on"AM" Radio Updating stations with bestreception 5. 4. quency. Turn controller acertain fre-the toset "Set" is selected. is "Set" Select "Autostore" and press the controller. into field Change top. second the the from ler. Select "FM"or "AM"press and thecontrol- Select "Autostore" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed. Press the controller. 164 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Storing stations are displayed. istion updated. frequenciesThe ofthe stations displayThe with stations best ofthe the recep- ory position selected. is ory Turn controllerthe until desiredmem- the displayed. is "Presets" controller. the press and "Store" Select Other menu items are displayed. Press the controller. selected. is "Set" Select the desired frequency or station. troller. tion criterion is selected and press the con- Turn controllerthe until selec- desired the into field Change second the the from top. ler. Select "FM"or "AM"press and thecontrol- 7. 4. 3. 2. 1. position memory a Changing to page refer buttons,also selection ble memory/direct onthe programma- astation can store also You selection buttons direct memory/ programmable With atthe control remote the used moment. for are saved stations the readiness, radio From time. ashort again after once displayed are criterion selection last the of stations The 2. 1. The stationis stored. Press the controller. Select "Store" and press the controller. the press and "Store" Select displayed. are items menu Other Press the controller. isselected. "Set" Select the desired station. controller. the press and "Presets" Select ton. astation. Select 21 ... Press and hold desired but- desired hold and Press ... . rentlyuse. in The issetting stored thefor control remote cur- 3. 2. 1. Switching RDS on/off* station names are displayed. disrupted,or time before cantake the it some weak is reception the If Display. Control the on are shown names ditions good,the are station tion via is transmitted If theRDS. reception con- informa- additional range, frequency FM In the RadioData System RDS 1. beginning. the at displayed are tions can set whether the most frequently used sta- For the "All stations" selection criterion, you stations* Automatically sorting 6. 5. RDS is activated. is RDS Select "RDS" and press the controller. displayed. are items menu Other Press the controller. "Set"selected. is Select "FM" and press the controller. "Set"selected. is ler. control- the press and stations" "All Select The stationis stored. Press the controller. station. the appears beside thenameor frequency of The number of the memory position selected. is ory position Turn controller the until desired the mem- 165

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Radio shown shown theat beginning. 2. 1. flashes news weather up Calling www.nws.noaa.gov. Details are also provided on the Internet at ofthe Weather Service. est National office near- please the contact Radio, Weather NOAA messages instead. If you have a question about warning special transmits and news weather interrupts routine Service the Weather National the storm, a of case In day. a hours 24 operate stations Most necessary. often when more and are routinely hours,intervals updatedto 3 at1 of minutes and to 6 flashes are repeated every 4 of the US Department of Trade. Weather news Administration andAtmospheric (NOAA) anic Oce- ofthe National aservice is Radio Weather flashes* news Weather unavailable in some regions. The station for weather news flashes may be 2. Select "Favorites" and press the controller. Select "WB" and press the controller. Select astation. The most frequently used stations are 166 station is not continuously received digitally, selected the which in area an in are you If nals. sig- analog with the simultaneously transmitted the stations signals digital not some are With being received digitally. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. reception Activating/deactivating digital radio order toreceive digital stations. A digital radio network quality.with improvedsound and signals.receive You can these stations digitally Many stations transmit both analog and digital High Definition Radio* The reception of digital stations is activated. is stations digital of reception The This symbol is displayed when a station is is astation when is displayed symbol This Select "Off" and press the controller. controller. until "HD radio" is selected and press the Change toupper field. theTurn controller Select "Audio" and press the controller. controller. the press and selected Turn controllerthe until is "Settings" menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press must be available in 1. select one of these programs: To Some stations transmit several programs. Selecting programsa digitalof station* deactivate digital radio reception. ruptions. In this case it maybe advisable to reception. This can result in repetitions or inter- playback switches between analog anddigital 1. reception signal. with best the stations list the of canupdate you set, originally stations the of range transmission If you are on a longer journey and leave the reception digital offering stations Updating 4. 3. 2. You can store a station, refer to page ler. Select "FM" or "AM" and press thecontroller. Select "FM" or "AM" and press thecontrol- is being received digitally. digitally. received is that station a Select controller. the press and "Manual" Select the steeringwheel. ital buttonsonthe station with or the radio This symbol is displayed when a station station a when displayed is symbol This Switch to the next program of the dig-the next of the Switch program to 164 . 2. 1. artist. of the on the current istrack displayed, e.g. the name the additionalWith digital information stations, Displaying additional information 2minutes.reception is This updated. can take upto The display of the stations offering digital 5. 4. 3. 2. Select "Details" and press the controller. the press and "Details" Select the controller. press and astation Select Select "Autostore " and press the con- the press "and troller. "Autostore Select displayed. are items menu Other Press the controller. Select "Autostore" and press the controller. into Change second the thefield from top. 167

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Radio tion. a againwill following displayed interrup- brief be the information additional station is changed, If a digital station is received again when the The information is displayed. is information The 168 choice, youmust have this package enabled. packages. receiveTo the channels of your The channels are offered to you in predefined with high sound quality. channels different 100 canup to receiveYou radio Satellite 3. 2. 1. channels Enabling or disabling 4. The channels are displayed. These channels are enabled. Select "SAT". Select "Entertainment". button. the controllerMove backwards open to the opens This start menu. the Press Press the controller. fail, causing interruptions in reception. this technologyWith new signal the may * < 3. 2. 1. Disabling 2. 1. Enabling Dial phone number. To havethe channels disabled: played. The electronic serial number, is ESN, dis- controller. the press and "ESN" Select controller. Select an enabled channel and press the Dial phone number. To enable the channels: displayed. ESN,are number, serial A telephone number and the electronic enabled and press the controller. Select achannel thathasnotyet been required todisable. The electronic serial number is required for enabling or disabling. The electronic serial number is 169 < <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Satellite radio 4. 3. 2. 1. Selecting andstoring channel controller. the press and category desiredthe Select If "Categories" has beenselected: Press the controller. > > > Select amenuitem: trol Display. Channels or categories appear in the Con- Select "SAT" and press the controller. news, jazz.news, All channels sorted bycategory, e.g. "Categories": displayed. are channels All channels": "All previously. Up totwelve channels youhavestored "Presets": 170 2 1 ofthe artist. name the current onthe track mation displayed, e.g. are infor- ofthe additional and channel name The Additional information 7. 6. 5. Track Artist Select "Play" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed. Press the controller. bol. channelsThe ofthis category are displayed. Select a channel marked with this sym- 4. 3. 2. 1. channel Storing nel. The system changes to the next enabled chan- the buttonfor corresponding direction. the Press player CD Changingchannel with buttons to next time. short after a again criterion areselection displayed The channel is stored. Thestations of the last tion and press the controller. the press and tion Turn the controller to select a memory posi- isdisplayed. "Presets" controller. the press and "Store" Select displayed. are items menu Other Press the controller. Select the desired channel. the signal again. available is the as assoon is again possible usually Reception interference. ofradio or sources other trees, mountains near underground garages, next totall buildings, The signal maynotbeavailable in tunnels or influence no has this. on topographical conditions. The satellite radio trol Display. seconds, a message is displayed on the Con- 4 If no signal canbe received for more than Notes reasons, e.g. environmental influences or Reception may notbe possible for certain 171 <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance CD player and CD changer Dchanger. CD played be by the CD player, butnotby the can MP3, i.e. files, audio compressed with CDs Compressed audio files* Listening toCDs CD changer CD playerand 2. 1. the drive: startTo playback whenthere is already a CDin dependingdata onthedirectory structure. the in toread minute 1 uptoapprox. cantake it files, audio compressed with CDs For on. is put if automatically starts soundout- the Playback up. TheCD is automatically pulled in. labeledside the drive with the into CD the Insert The upper drive is for audio CDs. drives: two With CD player: startingCD "Entertainment". button. Move thecontroller backwards toopen This opens the start menu. the Press 172 The CDemerges slightly from the drive. buttonnext toCD player. the Press the refer player, tostart topage CD tons but- selection memory/direct programmable You can store the function CDplayer on the buttons selection direct With programmable memory/ put is switched on. switched is put if automatically soundout- starts the Playback 4. 3. The CD player is started. ler. until "CD"selected is and press the control- field from topandturnthe controller the tothe aCD second changer, With change the controller. controller until "CD" is selected and press toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe * 21 . 4. 3. 2. 1. page to refer insert, and magazine CD the Fill CD changer: startingCD to page the refer changer, buttonstostart selection CD changer on the programmable memory/direct ofthe can CD You compartment a store CD selection buttons direct memory/ programmable With Display. Control the on is status indicated load CD magazine's The 1. track back begins with the lowest CD, e.g. CD1, If the CDmagazine has been newly filled, play- selected. endAt the last ofthe track, next the CD bewill the controller. desired is -6, CD, selected CD1 press and necessary. theTurn controller until the totheChange second field from topifthe the controller. controller until "CD" is selected and press Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the "Entertainment". button. the controllerMove backwards open to the opens This start menu. the Press 176 21 . . Select a track Select atrack turning theby controller. Via iDrive the steering wheel, refer to page can You changealso track the with buttons on The track is displayed on the Control Display. track. the of start at the play to will start CD The the buttonfor corresponding track. direction repeatedly until you reach the desired the Press Buttons toCDplayer next Selecting atrack 2. 1. Compressed audio files* Select the andpress track the controller. the controller. Select the directory if necessary and press 173 11 .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance CD player and CD changer page selection mable buttons, refermemory/direct to onthe acertain program- track store can You arrow and press the controller. Select the To exit fromthe menu: Select the directory and press the controller. the directory: change To 2. 1. ofthe e.g. track, name artist. the possibly included information about the current compressedWith audio files, youcan display Displayinginformation track* on control used at the moment is saved. the for radio setting remote the readiness, From played. current is information aboutthe track The dis- Select "Details" and press the controller. Press the controller. 21 . 174 player remains on current remains player the on track. This cancels ofthe sampling and the tracks, 2. 1. sampling: end To 2. 1. ofthe each onthe from tracks CD. current sample abrief plays automatically system The scan tracks, Sampling 2. 1. Compressed audio files* Select "Scan" and press the controller. Press the controller. Select "Scan" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed. Select "Set" and press the controller. > > Select the desired menuitem: troller. Select the con- the track current press and "Scan all" and press the controller. To sample all tracks ofthe select CD, the controller. tory, select "Scan directory" and press To sampleall tracks the of currentdirec- remainscurrent the on track. player the and search scan the cancels This 2. 1. search: scan end To 1. Repeating track 2. 2. 1. To cancel repeat mode: The current track on the CDis repeated. press the controller. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed. are items menu Other Select "Set" and press the controller. Select "Repeat" and press the controller. Select "Repeat" and press the controller. Pressthe controller again. 2. 1. To cancel repeat mode: 2. 1. Compressed audio files* 2. 1. Compressed audio files* 2. 1. To cancel randommode: 2. 1. sequence. in arandom once played In the currentthis mode, onthe aretracks CD Random play sequence and press the controller. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory" Press the controller. > > Select the desired menu item: troller. Select the current track the andpress con- > Select the desired menu item: troller. Select the current track the andpress con- controller. press the "Random" and Select Press the controller. controller. press the "Random" and Select displayed. are items menu Other Select "Set" and press the controller. the controller. tory, select "Repeat directory" and press repeat ofthe all tracks direc-current To the andpress track" controller. "Repeat repeat the select track, selected To tory" and press the controller. in random order, select "Random direc- directory current ofthe play all tracks To 175

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance CD player and CD changer 2. 1. mode: cancel random To Fast forward/reverse To insert CDs into the CD magazine into CD the magazine To insert CDs magazine CD Removing glovethe compartment. in installed is CDs six for changer CD BMW The CD magazine button corre- the for sponding direction. the and hold Press player:CD nextto Buttons Press button Press magazine from the CDchanger: the remove it,first you from must them remove read in again. read magazine thattheinserted again so CDs canbe before seconds pushing in the Wait atleast 2 and press the controller. Select directory" "Random all" or "Random Press the controller. > controller. the press all" and "Random select order, To play all tracks oftheCD in random 176 2 the magazine to eject CD 1 or or 1 . Pull outthe the tray desired CD. and remove remove: To with themagazine labeled side up. ofthe into Insert CD compartment each one insert: To face. avoid touching reflective the memory sur- CD themhold only their edges,by care taking to When inserting or removing CDs, remember to magazine CD Inserting/removing CDs into/from inserted CDs and is then ready operation. for ready then is and CDs inserted reads automatically in changer CD the The directionthe ofthe arrow. Push in the CDmagazine as far as possible in Inserting CD magazine longer eject. otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD longer beejected. no may and the canjam or adapter thewise CDs DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, other- cmand donotplay CDs/ in/12 diameter of 4.7 Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard system. tothe damage due heatto build-up and cause irreparable labels as these can come loose during playback adhesive with CDs self-recorded use not Do otherwise severe eye candamage result. notoperate theucts. Do if cover is damaged, Notes designed forthis purpose. Label using CDs/DVDs amarker onthetop, only blank. CD/DVD ofthe age or quality advanced data-creation or recording processes, or poor recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent Possible reasons for malfunctions with self- Home-recorded CDs/DVDs causes. this canbe DVDs, ofthe toone following due If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs temporarily prevent playback. and scan lens laser's the or CD/DVD the on tion High levels of humidity can lead to condensa- Humidity whether it has been inserted correctly. If aCD/DVD cannotbeplayed, first check CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be. more they sensitive be may to instances faulty optimized for performance in vehicles. In some BMW CD/DVD changers andplayers havebeen malfunctions General officially designated Class 1 laser prod- 1laser Class designated officially changers are and players CD/DVD BMW < Plus ; the center outward. cleaning cloth by wiping in straight lines from of the CDs/DVDs with a commercially available If necessary, clean thereflective scanning side Care extent. a limited DVDs becannot played or canonly beplayed to Thiscopy protection. ca with CDs/DVDs provide often Manufacturers CDs/DVDs with copy protection sunlight. 122 over to temperatures not CDs/DVDs Do subject asleeve. in CDs/DVDs Keep ture. mois- and scratches, dust, fingerprints Avoid Damaged CDs/DVDs 7 /50 6 , high levels of humidity or direct n mean that some CDs/ some n mean that 177

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance AUX-In connection Connecting via iDrive. cle loudspeakers. The sound can be adjusted the vehi- via the sound play player, and MP3 an You can connect an external audio device, e.g. AUX-In connection / n35mm jack plug. in/3,5 1/8 connection of the device tothe socket ers, connect the headphones or the line-out the loudspeak- vehicle via playback audio For 178 1 with a a with 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. The audio device must be switched on. Starting audio playback tons to start audio playback, refer audio refer tostart to playback, page tons but- selection memory/direct programmable the cansave audio ontheYou function AUX buttons selection direct With programmable memory/ Adjust volume and sound ifnecessary. sound and volume Adjust Select "AUX" and press thecontroller. the controller. press and selected is "AUX" until controller toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe "Entertainment". Move the controller button. backwards to open This opens the start menu. the Press 21 . the USB/audiothe interface. The menustructure of the iPod is supported by suitable. yourAsk BMWcenter which audio devices are cannot beensured for every audio device. market, theable operationvehicle on via the Due to the large number of audio devices avail- format. in the lists M3U playback as (PCM)e.g. MP3, WAV and WMA, well ACC, as audio files,common play backThe system can operate these va iDrive. then You can stick). memory USB player, (MP3 device aUSB aniPod or interface, e.g. audio can You audio connect tothedevices USB/ USB/audio interface ers, connect the iPod tothe connections For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeak- website: www.bmw.com centerplease contact aBMW consultor our adapter for Apple iPods. For more information, To connect the iPod, use the BMWcable iPod 2 1 Connecting and 1/8 in/3,5 mm jack plug jack mm in/3,5 1/8 Connection foraudio playback: interface USB 2 . 1

* played. in the vehicle is deleted. stored device USB first of the tracks the of tion informa- is the device If afifthconnected, USB tracks. 20,000 the stored in vehicle,be ofapprox. atotal for can devices ofup USB to information four The lists. playback and the information via transfer the Following cancall you tracks upthe the directories and file names. via tracks the can select you transfer the During device USB the number oftracks. onthe and some time. The time required is dependent on totheferred vehicle. cantake This process are playback ofthe device the trans- lists USB and genre) (e.g. music ofall tracks tion artist, connecting first informa- the After time, the for tion ers, connect device the USB connec- to the For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeak- damage. mechanical against device USB USB storage medium 1 . Rights Management (DRM) cannot be cannot (DRM) Management Rights Music tracks with integrated Digital tion interfaceto USB protect the andyour Use a flexible adapter cable for connec- < 179 <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance USB/audio interface 3. 2. 1. possible. if displayed be If the audio device has a device name, this will Via iDrive Starting audio playback start start playback, audio refer topage grammable memory/direct selection buttons to onthe pro- function the "USB" cansave You buttons selection direct With programmable memory/ 4. 5. the controller. press and selected is "AUX" until controller fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe "Entertainment". button. Move thecontroller backwards toopen This opens the start menu. the Press device and press the controller. ofthe the or name audio "USB" Select The playback starts with playback the starts The first track. 180 21 . played. current information aboutthe track The is dis- 2. 1. track, artist.current the ofthe e.g. name You can display any information stored on the Displaying information track on 2. 1. call upthe the via tracks file directory. and information. USBWith devices you can also can You call upthe via tracks the lists playback Selecting a track Select "Details" and press the controller. Press the controller during playback. Select the track and press the controller. ists", and press the controller. Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or "Art- 2. 1. Repeating track rs n odte thebutton for corresponding direction. andholdPress the nextplayer: toCD Buttons forward/reverse Fast 2. 1. End randomplayback: 2. 1. all ofanartist. order, e.g. in tracks random You can play theback tracks of the selected list Random play sequence 2. 1. To cancel repeat mode: troller. con- the press and track" "Repeat Select troller. Select the current track the andpress con- Select "Random" and press the controller. press the "Random" and Select Press the controller. controller. press the "Random" and Select troller. Select the current track the andpress controller. con- the press and track" "Repeat Select Press the controller. proper playback cannot always be ensured. be always playback cannot proper Kbit/s, than256 greater bit e.g. files, rates Depending on the configuration of the audio driving. while resulting distraction can reduce road safety wise, theaudio devicebe damaged the can and Other- device. audio the of instructions ating extremely high temperatures, refer to the oper- > > > > > instructions Connecting Notes external devices. the interface notuse audio Do torecharge Do notconnect harddisks. USB interface. tothe lamps, USB/audio Do notconnect anydevices, e.g.fans or not Do force plugthe into the interface. USB operation. device toa socket in the vehicle during therefore unnecessary to connect the audio function.this Itis device audio supports the nected audio device with power, provided The USB/audio interface supplies the con- extreme environmental conditions, e.g. the device audio notsubject Do to < 181

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance

Communications

This chapter summarizes how to operate your mobile phone using iDrive or voice control and how to use BMW Assist or TeleService. Telephoning via the vehicle. recently paired mobile phonecanbe operated phones are detected simultaneously, the most can be stored simultaneously. If several mobile The pairingon. to dataof four up mobilephones the engine is running or the ignition is switched brought backinside the vehicle, provided that as is as it again detected soon automatically A mobile phone thathas been paired once is the buttons on the steering wheel and byvoice. can operate the mobile phone via iDrive, with phone has been paired in the vehicle once, you mobile asuitable After package. preparation iswith full equippedYour BMW a mobilephone The concept Telephoning observe this precaution, your being distracted the hands-free system instead. If you do not phone in your hand while you are driving; use attention tothe particular following: information, we request that you direct your and precautions safety description of detailed a operating instructions for separate phone's gency. While you should consult your mobile ways,many can andevensave lives inan emer- in convenient more life makes phone car A safety For your for. offered are which adapters snap-in phones mobile ter voice reproduction quality. Askyour cen- BMW recept network improved nal antennaofyour vehicle. This ensures mobile the to phone connectedbe to exter-the and the charged tobe battery enables cradle, phone amobile adapter, snap-in so-called The Using snap-inadapter* inyour vehicle phone Using a allow you to do so. Do not hold the mobile the not hold Do so. todo you allow Only make entries when traffic conditions 184 ion and a consistent ion aconsistent and * phone, otherwise malfunctions can occur. vehiclethe with the mobile ofthe keypad Avoid operating a mobile phonedetected by > > > > Care instructions mobile phones. version. Malfunctions can occur with other providedrunningthey certain are a software Manual, Owner's this in described functions they offer. These mobile phones support the mobile phones will infit snap-in the adapters mobile phonepreparation packageor which with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the yourAsk BMWcenter which mobile phones Suitable mobile phones tion", only AssistBMW calls are possible. "BMW Service" is displayed in "Communica- When the status information "BMW Assist" or Assist calls. hands-free unit for BMW the via system Assist BMW the use can You Assist calls system*: BMW Assist callsPlacing phone withBMW You can operate the mobile phone Operating options operating instructions.phone for your vehicle brochure and in the mobile ing foryourmobileCaring phoneintheseparate You canfind whatyou need toknow aboutcar- users. can endanger vehicle occupants and other road buttons, buttons, refer topage Programmable memory/directselection Voice commands, refer topage Buttonson steering wheel, refer to page iDrive, refer topage iDrive, refer < 16 21 * 195 using: 11 It may not be possible to establish a telephone Switching on ignition connection using the mobile phone while a con- 1. Insert the remote control as far as possible nection is being established to BMW Assist into the ignition lock. or while a call to BMW Assist is already in

2. Switch on the ignition by pressing the Start/ glance a At progress. If this happens, you must unpair the Stop button without depressing the brake mobile phone and the vehicle if you wish to or clutch pedal. place a call with the mobile phone. Preparation via iDrive Initial operation iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16. 3. Press the button to open the start Controls Pairing mobile phone in vehicle menu. The following prerequisites must be met: > Suitable mobile phone: the mobile phone is supported by the full mobile phone preparation package. Information on this subject is also provided on the Internet at: www.bmw.com Driving tips > The mobile phone is ready to operate. > The Bluetooth links of the vehicle, refer to page 189, and the mobile phone are active. > Depending on the mobile phone, presets in 4. Press the controller to open the menu. the mobile phone are required: e.g. via the 5. Select "Settings" and press the controller. following menu items: Navigation > Bluetooth activated > Connection not with confirmation > Reconnect > Depending on the mobile phone model, the setting energy saving mode can, for exam- Entertainment ple, result in vehicle failing to detect the paired mobile phone. > Specify any desired number as the Blue- tooth passkey, e.g. 1, for pairing. This Blue- 6. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller. tooth passkey is no longer required following successful pairing. > The ignition is switched on. Communications Only pair the mobile phone with the vehicle stopped, otherwise the passengers and other road users can be endangered due to a lack of attentiveness on the part of the driver.< Mobility

185 Reference Telephoning 7. 8. 9. select "Phone" and press the controller. into field top, Change second the the from troller. "PairSelect new phone" press and the con- played. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis- ler. Select "Start pairing" and press the control- 186 phone. operatingto the instructions ofyour mobile item AuthorizationorSecure connection. Refer Bluetooth link, e.g.a thepermanent via menu ignitionthe switched on. minutes with the engine running or imum of 2 a max- within detected be will it interior, vehicle The next time you use the mobile phone in the 14. 13. 12. tooth passkey you specified. mobile your iDrive or phone toenter the Blue- be requested consecutively via the display of Depending onyour mobile phone,you will first Pairing 11. 10. Preparation with mobile phone tion" menuappears. "Communica- the until seconds afew Wait controller. select "Confirm passkey" and press the into Change thirdthe thefield from top, Display. Control the on and Bluetooth passkey onthe mobile phone seconds are available for entering the 30 Depending onthe mobile phone,approx. the Bluetooth passkey. Enter the mobile phone display. vehicle ofthe Select Bluetooth the name on on themobile phone display. Bluetooth name of the vehicleis also shown nect or pair under Bluetooth device. The ofyour tions e.g. phone, mobile con- find, model, totheon the refer instruc- operating on themobile phone anddiffer depending carried out be must operations Additional be necessary to make certain settings for for certain settings to make necessary be With some mobile phone models it may < As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the To repeat pairing: vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the 1. Select "Restart pairing" and press the con- SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit- troller. ted to your vehicle. This transmission is dependent on your mobile phone, refer to the operat- glance a At ing instructions of your mobile phone if necessary, and can take several minutes. If not all phone book entries are displayed: > Transfer all phone book entries from the SIM card to the mobile phone if necessary.

> It may not be possible to display phone Controls book entries with special characters. Up to four mobile phones can be paired consec- 2. Repeat steps 9 to 14. utively. When you pair a fifth mobile phone, the If pairing was repeatedly unsuccessful, contact pairing data of the mobile phone for which the BMW Customer Relations. pairing data were stored first in the vehicle will To call BMW Customer Relations: be deleted. Driving tips Select "Help" and press the controller. Check if pairing is unsuccessful > Is the mobile phone supported by the mobile phone preparation package? Infor- mation on this subject is also provided on the Internet at: www.bmw.com. Navigation > Do the Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? The same Bluetooth passkey must be entered both on the mobile phone display and via iDrive. > Have you required longer than 30 seconds The phone number of BMW Customer Rela- to enter the Bluetooth passkey? tions and information required for pairing is > Only a limited number of devices can be shown on the display. With mobile phones Entertainment connected to the mobile phone. Delete the already paired, you can select the phone num- connection to other devices if necessary. ber of BMW Customer Relations to establish > The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch the connection. the mobile phone off and then on again or disconnect the power supply. Communications Mobility

187 Reference Telephoning 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for vehicle. the via ated in this list, the mobile phones cannot be oper- selected is phone mobile a as long As list. the in You canchangetheorder ofthemobile phones cle. mobile phone highest upin the list via the vehi- vehicle simultaneously,operatecan you the eral paired mobile phones are detected by the stored thepairing data can bedisplayed. If sev- The mobile phones for which the vehicle has List of paired mobile phones > With asingle drive: > > drives: two With Select the desired mobile phone. select "Phone" and press the controller. into field top, Change second the the from Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller. controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. the button toopen start Press the controller to open the menu. the Press press the controller. Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller. Select the desired mobile phone and field. into bottom the controller change the tothe Move rear to 188 inciple refer topage 16 . iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for of the mobile phone. the via youvehicle, the candelete pairingdata If you no longer want to operate a mobile phone Unpairing mobile phone from vehicle 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. 7. > With asingle drive: > > drives: two With Select the desired mobile phone. select "Phone" and press the controller. into field Change second the the from top, "Bluetooth" is selected. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller. controller. the press and "Settings" Select menu. the button toopen start Press the controller to open the menu. the Press Switch offthemobile phone. upward by oneposition. The selected mobile phone is moved troller. Select "Move device up" and press the con- press the controller. Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller. Select the desired mobile phone and field. into bottom the controller change tothe the Move rear to inciple refer topage 16 . 5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller. At a glance a At

8. Select "Delete device" and press the con- Controls troller. 6. Change into the second field from the top, select "Settings" and press the controller. Driving tips

The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the list. 7. Select "Bluetooth communication active"

The phone book entries and the lists of and press the controller to activate or deac- Navigation stored phone numbers are also deleted. tivate the link.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link Bluetooth technology is not approved in all countries. Observe the applicable local regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Blue- tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile Entertainment phone if necessary. If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and the mobile phone can use other devices with a Bluetooth interface, e.g. a laptop computer.< The Bluetooth link is activated. To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link The Bluetooth link is deactivated. Communications between your vehicle and your mobile phone: 1. Remove the mobile phone from the cradle and switch it off. 2. Press the button to open the start menu. 3. Press the controller to open the menu. Mobility 4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

189 Reference Telephoning rently in use. in rently settingThe is for stored the controlremote cur- Adjusting volume noises certain a degree. to preparation package can compensate for these fullphone noises. mobile The loud background stand you well, this may be due to excessively If the are you person talking tocannot under- Speech quality more than 25 minutes. call ongoinghands-free via thean forno system control from the ignition lock, you can continue remote the removing after e.g. off, switched When the ignition and radio readiness are > > > > > iDrive: You can operate the following functions via viaiDrive Operation on the steering wheel, refer to page with buttons the volume the also adjust can You minimum volume. tained, evenifthe other audio sources are set to volumeThisfor the hands-free system is main- volume. desired the select call to during a knob the Turn Ending acallEnding calls accepted of list Dialing stored phonenumbers,e.g. fromthe book Dialing phone numbers from the phone Dialing phone numbers Accepting/rejectingcall a 190 11 . Opening Communication Opening > > > Requirements is displayed. ber has the been transmitted, name of the entry in stored andthe phone the num- phone book callerphone the numberof the you have If Receiving calls pr operating iDrive, for menu. following the the via "Communication" You operate many of the functions described in 2. 1. > > recommend that you: speech quality during acall, we the optimize To cle. The mobile phone is detected by the vehi- switched on. The engine is running or the ignition is is ready to operate. stored in the vehicle and the mobile phone The pairing data of the mobile phone are munication". Move the controller forward to open "Com- the button toopen start menu. the Press tem. ofthe the hands-free Reduce volume sys- front outlets vent opened downward. control climate automatic or pointing the ofthe the reducing windows, the air volume Reduce backgroundnoises, e.g.byclosing inciple refer topage 16 . Accepting a call To delete the last digit: Press the button on the steering wheel. Move the controller toward the right to select the arrow and press the control- Alternative: ler. "Accept" is selected. glance a At 4. Select "Dial number" and press the control- Press the controller. ler. Controls

Rejecting a call Alternative:

Select "Reject" and press the controller. Press the button on the steering wheel. Driving tips The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has For your phone number to be displayed to the been activated. person you are calling, the display of phone numbers must be enabled by your service pro- Calling vider.

Dialing phone numbers With programmable memory/ Navigation 1. Select "Phone" and press the controller. direct selection buttons You can store phone numbers on and call them up with the programmable memory/direct selection buttons, refer to page 21.

Ending a call

Press the button on the steering wheel. Entertainment Alternative: 1. Select the phone number and press the controller. 2. Select "Dial" and press the controller. 3. Enter the desired phone number by dialing the individual digits and pressing the con- Communications troller. Always enter the complete phone number consisting of national dialing code, area code, and phone number. The letters correspond to the digits on the keypad of the mobile phone. Mobility

191 Reference Telephoning 2. > > > > > available: lists are Five list and establish the connection. the from subscriber desired the select can You played instead of the phone number. entry the ofthe phone the name is dis- book, vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in lists when the mobile phone is connected to the the entriesand the of phone are book stored in Phone numbershave called, you incoming calls listaa phone numberor storedinbook Dialing a phone number from phone Press the controller. selected: is call" "End sent. telephone number of the caller to have been accepted calls are stored. This requires the The phone numbers of the last eight "Received calls" to have been sent. requires the telephone number of the caller which were not accepted are stored. This phonetheof last numbersThe eight calls calls" "Missed is atthe dialed number list. topofthe dialed are automatically stored. The last The last eight phone numbers you have "Redial" list. 8 Top the in stored cally -Z" are the automati- book"A from phone The eight numbers called most frequently "Top 8" number, are sorted alphabetically. phone and the name of consisting book, The entries of the mobile-phone phone "A - Z" 192 4. 3. 2. 1. phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension: You can change a phone number stored in the number. the home, name is shown once for eachphone mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and If different phone numbers are stored in the 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Control Display. entries. Thephone entriesbook appear on the The list - "A Z" is available foryou phone book book Dialingphone numbers phone from Select digits" "Add and press thecontroller. troller. Select the desired entry and press the con- controller. press- Z"and the Select"A Select"Phone" presscontroller. and the The system dials the number. Select "Call" and press the controller. troller. Select the desired entry and press the con- press the controller. and entry desired the of letter first the select theTo limit of number entries, displayed controller. press- Z"and the Select"A Select"Phone" presscontroller. and the 5. Change the phone number. Deleting individual entries 6. Select "Dial number" and press the control- 1. Select the desired entry from the list and ler. press the controller.

2. Select "Delete" and press the controller. glance a At Dialing a phone number stored in a list To select an entry and establish a connection: 1. Select "Phone" and press the controller. 2. Select list and press the controller: > "Top 8"

> "Redial" Controls > "Missed calls" > "Received calls" The entry is deleted.

Deleting entire list Driving tips 1. Select an entry from the list and press the controller. 2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the controller.

3. Select the desired entry and press the con- Navigation troller. Entertainment

3. If applicable, select "Yes" and press the controller. The list is deleted.

4. Select "Call" and press the controller. BMW Contact* The system dials the number.

If you have not enabled BMW Assist, you can Communications have several service numbers displayed: > Roadside Assistance* of the BMW Group when you require breakdown assistance > BMW center, e.g. when you want to make an appointment for service >

BMW Customer Relations* for information Mobility on all aspects of your vehicle If BMW Assist is enabled, refer to page 199.

193 Reference Telephoning Contact is established. is Contact 6. 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for cle: bers if your mobile phone is paired in the vehi- You can dial the displayed service phone num- 4. 5. Select "Call" and press the controller. troller. the con- press and Contact" "BMW Select "Communication". select to forwards button. controller the Move This opens the start menu. the Press the controller. press and Numbers" Contact "BMW Select > > > press the controller: Select one of the following menu items and "Service Request" Relations" "Customer "Roadside Assistance" 194 inciple refer topage 16 . 3. 2. 1. has been established. functionThis is available when aconnection e.g. remote checking of an answering machine. or services controllingfor devices, to network access for required is method dialing tone The dialing method tone via number phone Transferring mobile phonemodel. confirmed by a tone depending onthe and immediately sent is character Each controller. Select the desired character bottom field is selected. controller the Move until backwards the drives: two With Select "Keypad" and press the controller. Press the controller. With asingle drive: Establish connection.

and press the Changing between mobile Operation by voice* phone and hands-free system The concept

From mobile phone to hands-free You can operate your mobile phone without glance a At system* having to remove your hands from the steering You can continue calls begun outside the Blue- wheel. When making your entries, you will be tooth range of the vehicle via the hands-free supported by announcements or questions in system when the engine is running or the igni- many cases. tion is switched on. Depending on your mobile The same prerequisites as for operation via phone, the system automatically switches over iDrive apply, refer to page 190. to the hands-free mode. Controls For mobile phones that do not automatically Voice commands switch over to the hands-free mode: Activating system > Depending on the mobile phone model used, the conversation can be continued via 1. Briefly press the button on the steering the hands-free system if necessary. Follow wheel.

the instructions displayed on the mobile An acoustic signal indicates that you can Driving tips phone display, refer to the operating say commands. instructions of your mobile phone. 2. Say the command. > Press the button above the storage compartment. Switching over may take Ending/canceling operation by voice several seconds. Press the button on the steering wheel or Navigation From hands-free system to mobile {Cancel}. phone In dialogs where text is spoken, not a command, When you telephone via the hands-free system, e.g. a name, canceling is only possible using the you can also continue the call via the mobile button on the steering wheel. phone if necessary, depending on the mobile phone model. Act according to what is shown Having possible commands read aloud on the mobile phone display, refer to the oper- Entertainment ating instructions of your mobile phone. The system understands default commands that must be spoken word for word. As an alternative, you can deactivate the Blue- You can have the possible commands spoken tooth link. by the system at any point: Depending on your mobile phone model, poor {Help}. reception of the wireless communications network can result in the system switching from Communications the hands-free system to the mobile phone. Using alternative commands There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.: {Dial name} or {Name}. The system recognizes digits from zero to nine. You can say each digit individually or group Mobility them into a sequence to accelerate the input.

195 Reference Telephoning { button on the steering wheel. Press the dialog: the Start Example: dialing phone numbers established. The connection to the desired subscriber is Dialing phone numbers Calling use. in rently settingThe is for stored the controlremote cur- mum volume. even if the other audio sources are set to mini- volumethe forinstructionsThis maintained, is instructions. during knob the Turn system: the from for canadjustthe instructionsYou the volume Settingvolume ofinstructions { e.g. e.g. You say Dial number Dial Dial 3. 2. 1. { }{{ 2 5 7890 456 123 { theand then country code. For telephone calls abroad, say Say the phone number. { Dial Dial number 196 } }{{ . } } . {{ {{ Dependingequipment: on The voice control answers control voice The Dialing number 2 5 7890. And next? 456 123 Please say the number 2 5 7890. Continue? 456 123 { Plus } }} repeated as often as you like. asyou often as repeated The command this sequence ofdigits. been repeated by the system, you can delete ofdigits sequence has the After last spoken Correcting phone number > > book. phone Operating by requiresvoice apersonal voice book Voice phone All entered digits up to this point are deleted. phonenumber Deleting consists ofanameandphone number. entries can input. be always entry An 50 Upto numbers. or phone new to store to call phone numbers stored in the mobile not possible to use voice command either mobile phone's memory. In this case, it is input byvoice and are independent of your asingle drive, With be must entries the adopted from your mobile phone'smemory. are automatically the entries DVDs, igation With separate drives for audio CDs and nav- { The digits are deleted. { Delete Correct number }} }} }} or } { Correct number } . } can be Creating and editing voice phone Selecting an entry book* The connection to the phone number of the Save entry: selected entry is established. { } An entry always consists of a name and phone 1. Dial name . glance a At number. The dialog for selecting an entry is 1. {Save name}. opened. 2. Say the name. 2. Say the name when prompted. The spoken length of the names in the 3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}. phone book must not exceed approx. 2seconds. Redialing Controls 3. Say the phone number after being The {Redial} command calls up "Redial". requested to do so by the system. 4. To store the phone number: {Save}. Notes Delete entry: Important for voice commands

You can delete any entry from the voice phone Driving tips For voice commands, keep the following in book. mind: 1. {Delete name}. > Issue the commands smoothly and at nor- The dialog for deleting an entry is mal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis opened. and pauses. 2. Say the name when prompted. > Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof

{ } Navigation 3. Confirm the prompt with Yes . closed to prevent interference from ambi- Delete all entries: ent noise. {Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the > Avoid making other noise in the vehicle phone book. while speaking. 1. {Delete phone book}. The dialog for deleting phone book is

opened. Mounting/removing snap-in Entertainment 2. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}. adapter 3. Confirm the repeated prompt with 1. Press the area 1 around the button and {Yes}. remove the cover. Have entries read aloud and dial: You can have all the entries of your voice phone book read aloud in the order of input and select Communications a certain entry to establish a connection: 1. {Read phone book}. The dialog for reading phone book is opened. 2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is

read aloud. Mobility

197 Reference Telephoning 2. Press the area area the Press adapter: snap-in the remove To 2. 1. phone mobile Inserting charged. unlocked the mobile phone's battery is radioFrom readiness orsteering with the press downuntil it engages. front and at the adapter snap-in the Insert tions andpress downuntil it engages. mobile phone toward the electrical connec- the With buttons upward, the facing press adapter. snap-in that themobile phone canengagein the phone's antennaconnector if necessary, so protective the Remove capfrom the mobile 198 1 around around button. the Press button. Press Removing mobilephone switched off. switched using the when ignition phone the is theTo vehicle'sprotect batteries, avoid < BMW Assist*

BMW Assist provides you with various services. Offered services glance a At For example, the position data of your vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist The following services are available via Response Center if an emergency request* has BMW Assist: been initiated. > Emergency request, refer to page 227: Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi- When you press the SOS button, a connec- vidually agreed contract. tion is established to the BMW Assist

Response Center. The BMW Assist Controls After your contract has expired, the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW further steps to help you. Assist Response Center without you having to > visit a BMW center. Following the deactivation Automatic collision notification: of the BMW Assist systems, no BMW Assist Under certain conditions a connection is service is available. The BMW Assist system be established to the BMW Assist Response Center directly following a serious accident.

reactivated by a BMW center after signing a Driving tips new contract. If possible, the BMW Assist Response Cen- ter contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Requirements > Enhanced roadside assistance: You can call Roadside Assistance* of the You can use BMW Assist when the following BMW Group should you require help in the requirements are met: event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehi- Navigation > The installed BMW Assist system is logged cle and position data are transmitted in the on to a mobile phone network. This network process. must be capable of transmitting the ser- > BMW Customer Relations: vices. For information related to your vehicle, call > To transmit position data, the vehicle must BMW Customer Relations. be able to determine the current position. > TeleService: Entertainment > In order to activate and update BMW Assist, The data on the service status of your vehi- a GPS signal must be available. cle or on required inspections are transmit- > You have subscribed to BMW Assist with ted to your BMW center either automati- your BMW center or with the BMW Assist cally prior to the due date or when you Response Center. Enabling must have request a BMW service appointment. been completed. > Remote door unlock:

> BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 204. Inform the BMW Assist Response Center, Communications e.g. if your remote control is not available and you want to have the vehicle unlocked. > Stolen vehicle recovery: After your vehicle has been reported to the police as stolen, the BMW Assist Response Center can locate its position. To do this, Mobility the vehicle electronics must be ready for operation.

199 Reference BMW Assist cierge service via the Internet. con- Assist BMW tothe access have also You Assist Response Center, see below. BMW button tocontactthe SOS the Press mobile phonewith you. Response Center, e.g. if youdo nothave your Assist BMW the via ofcalls number limited weather. With Critical Calling, you can make a the planning,and trafficconditions, route on vices, e.g. the concierge service or information In addition, you can beprovided with other ser- 1. button. SOS the via Center Response Assist the BMW contact can You Center BMW AssistResponse Contacting Using services > > > vices: The following characteristics apply to the ser- Characteristics of theoffered services 2. somewhat. switches and indicator lamps may differ in the Convertible, the arrangement of the With some vehicle equipment packages or Briefly press protective cover toopen. CBS Condition Based Service data. vehiclethe data,your position the current or be example, can, for datatransmitted The possible todoboth. In countries, it country. and the some is transferred, depending on the equipment contact is Voice orestablished data are The services offered are country-specific. rs h utnfra es seconds. button the 2 atleast for Press 200 iDrive, pr operating iDrive, for Roadside assistance 4. 3. 2. 1. tacted. con- is Center Response Assist BMW The rent vehicle position is displayed. If the location determined, can be the cur- the controller. press and Assistance" "Roadside Select and press the controller. selected is Assist" "BMW until controller toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe "Communication". Move the controller forwards to select button. This opens the start menu. the Press inciple refer topage 16 . 5. Select "Start service" and press the con- 6. Select "Service notification" and press the troller. controller. The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you to the Roadside Assistance of the At a glance a At BMW Group.

TeleService

Automatic service notification* The data on the service status of your vehicle or on required inspections are transmitted auto- Controls matically prior to the due date. You can check when the BMW center was notified. Manual service notification 1. Press the button. You can transmit data regarding your vehicle's This opens the start menu. service status to your BMW center when you wish to arrange a service appointment. 2. Press the controller to open the menu. 1. Press the button. 3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- Driving tips This opens the start menu. ler. 2. Move the controller forwards to select "Communication". 3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller. Navigation

4. Select "Service" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the Entertainment controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Service Request". Communications Mobility 5. Press the controller. 6. Select "Start service" and press the controller.

201 Reference BMW Assist appointment for service. for appointment center contact will upan toset you Your BMW transmitted. for are datarelevant service The 3. 2. 1. you can contact BMWCustomer Relations. vehicle, your of aspects all on information For Contacting BMW Customer Relations 4. BMW Assist Response Center. Response Assist BMW Hotline by the You are connected to the BMW 6. 5. and press the controller. selected is Assist" "BMW until controller fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe "Communication". select to forwards button. controller the Move This opens the start menu. the Press Select "Customer Relations". "Customer Select troller. Select"Start service" presscon- and the Press the controller. 202 you with a BMW Assist Concierge. Assist aBMW with you connect will Center Response Assist BMW The 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Calling up information Center. Response Assist BMW the by rately The concierge service must beenabled sepa- cierge service. Con- Assist BMW the through directly booked can transmitted. hotels Many addresses be hotels and have their phone numbers and mation on current events, filling stations or Assist, you can, for example, obtain infor- BMW When you call the concierge service of Concierge service* troller. Select "Start Service" andpress the con- ler. Select"Concierge" presscontrol- and the and press the controller. selected is Assist" "BMW until controller toChangefield upper if necessary. Turnthe "Communication". button. Move the controller forwards to select This opens the start menu. the Press Displaying transmitted data 3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is Select the received message if necessary and selected and press the controller. press the controller. At a glance a At Controls

4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service settings" is selected and press the controller. Dialing a phone number or transferring an address for destination guidance 1. Select "Options" and press the controller. Driving tips

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the Navigation controller until "Service Status" is selected and press the controller. 2. Select a menu item: The currently available BMW Assist ser- > With "Call" you can establish a telephone vices are displayed. connection. A prerequisite for this is that 6. If applicable, select "Options" and press the your Bluetooth mobile phone has been controller.

paired with the vehicle. Entertainment > Press "Select as destination" to transfer the address to the navigation system for destination guidance.

Updating BMW Assist Communications

Displaying and updating services You will be notified of any changes in the ser- 7. Select "Update services" and press the vices offered by BMW Assist. In this case, you controller. should update the service functions. 1. Press the button. This opens the start menu. Mobility 2. Press the controller to open the menu.

203 Reference BMW Assist again. on tolog necessary if Assist BMW Reactivate does not affect the contractual agreements. This below. see Assist, BMW reactivate and 4. 3. 2. 1. deactivated. is Assist BMW If you theblock services, connectionthe to Blocking services* 6. 5. ing an emergencyrequesting an dur- vehicle will position rent transmitted notbe AssistThe useofis BMW blocked, the cur- and 7. tings" is selected and press the controller. the press and selected is tings" Turn the controllerService until"BMW set- controller. the press and selected Turn controllerthe until "Settings" is menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press Select "Options" and press the controller. and press the controller. selected is Status" "Service until controller fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe controller. Select "Terminate services" and press the 204 * . Tocancel blocking 3. 2. 1. Activating > > Requirements vices. be touse ser- activated the must Assist BMW Assist Activating BMW selected and press the controller. the press and selected Turn controllerthe until is "Settings" menu. Press the controller to open the button. This opens the start menu. the Press activationthe process. during on switched readiness radio Leave you have an unobstructed view to the sky. current position. is Reception best when vehicle its thesure candetermine that Make 4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set- Displaying vehicle data tings" is selected and press the controller. When BMW Assist is activated, the license plate and the vehicle identification number of

your vehicle may be displayed. glance a At 1. Open the start menu. 2. Press the controller to open the menu. 3. Select "Settings" and press the controller. Controls

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service Status" is selected and press the controller. Driving tips

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press the controller. Navigation 6. Select "Enable services" and press the controller. BMW Assist is activated and the data exchange with the BMW Assist Response Center begins.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the Entertainment controller until "Profile" is selected and press the controller. Communications

Activation takes a few minutes. The status is displayed on the Control Display. If you open another menu, the activation process continues to run in the background. Mobility

205 Reference

Mobility

This section helps you maintain your mobility by supplying important information on vital topics including fuels and lubricants, wheels and tires, service, maintenance and roadside assistance. Refueling an afire in or explosion an anaccident. tainers in the vehicle. They can leak and cause fuel transport con- reserve Never regulations. displayed.is message a and tank Refueling Observe the following when refueling following when the Observe the gas pumpsymbol onthe right side panel. pullIn the luggage compartment, the knob with release the fuel filler door manually: can you malfunction, electrical an of event the In Unlocking manually the fuel filler door. openclose: andTo briefly press the rearedgeof Fuel filler door precautions posted atthe filling station. safety the follow fuels, handling When and measures precautionary applicable handlingWhen fuel, always observe all otherwise no fuel can befilled into the before engine refueling, off Switch the 208 < < missing. A message fuel vapors and escape. can seal a clearly audibleclick. Insert capandturnthe it clockwise until there is Closing fillerFuel cap can occur. ensured damage and km, otherwise engine functions are not 50 liters. gal/10 US 2.6 approx. capacity of reserve liters, including the gal/70 US 18.5 Approx. Fuel tankcapacity off firstoff the time. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks > > nozzle during refueling, otherwise this filler the raising Avoid pipe. filler the into pletely When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com- to the fuel filler door. Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached and property damage. Otherwise, there is a danger personalof injury vapor recovery system can lead toreduced efficiency in the fuel- shutoff pump premature in results cap; otherwise, the cap may not properly notcrush Do tothe bandattached the miles/ cruising range falls below 30 as as possibleRefuel soon once your * is displayed if the cap is loose or or loose is cap the if displayed is < < < tem will result. tem damage to the engine and the fuel supply sys- permanent Otherwise Fuel. Flex or ethanol, i.e. notuseDo E85, fuel thatconsists of85 SuperPremium Gasoline/AKI 91 fuel Required Fuel specifications may also result in unscheduled maintenance. unscheduled in result also may recommendations these with comply to Failure Gasoline. Detergent is that TopTier as as gasoline such advertised recognizedby switchingto a high-quality brand you are using, we recommend that you respond which could you be suspect related tothe fuel Should you encounter drivability problems high altitude. and temperature ambient certain environmental conditions such highas under to stall, especially tendency to a and ing, workmanship. or in materials to defects respect the applicable with not void warranties plus anequivalent of amount co-solvent, will methanol 3% or MTBE 15% is, that weight, oxygenother by oxygenates with upto 2.8% ethanol or containing uptoandincluding 10% Fuels Canada. and States United the in sale for offered gasolines among etc., additives, tion, in composi- quality: fuel volatility, differences significant demonstrated has experience Field Use high-qualitybrands can result.age This has noaffectonthe engine life. temperatures. athighstarting when outside ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat- AKI. The minimum AKI rating is 87. However, you may also use gasoline with less This gasoline is highly recommended. nently damage the the nently damage catalytic converter. perma- will it gasoline; leaded used Never problems relating to drivability and start- ofThe use poor-quality fuelsresult may in minimum quality, otherwise engine dam- Do not use gasoline below the specified < < % <

209

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Wheels and tires refer topage fort and most importantly, driving driving most safety. importantly, and fort com- driving to life,but also service tire's the to theof specified tire pressure are crucial not only maintenance andthe tires ofthe condition The Information for your safety Tire inflation pressure Wheels and tires > > > ing: tion pressure for your tires, observe the follow- identification correct For rightof tire the infla- these is available from your center. BMW approved and recommended by BMW; a list of temperature. pressuresthe for specifiedtire sizes at ambient The tables below provide all the correct inflation specificationsPressure page tire inflation pressures. therefore accidents, can result from incorrect wise, driving instability or tire damage, and month and before starting long trips. Other- warm, the tire inflation pressure increases. hours. When tires are been parked for at least 2 km driving or when the vehicle has miles/2 1.25 are cold. This means after a maximum of Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires pressure Checking Maximum allowable driving speed conditionsLoad vehicle your for sizes Tire 89 sizes and tire brands respectively brands tire and respectively sizes The inflation pressures apply to the tire reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to correctingpressure, tire inflation After the and correct it needed: as at least twice a Check the tireinflation pressure regularly , or the, or Tire Pressure Monitor, reset 210 91 . < < < occur. could law the of violations otherwise limits, Observe all national and local maximum speed wise, tire anddamage accidents could occur. your tire inflation pressures as needed. Other- of the table onthefollowing pages and adjust 100 mph/160 km/h listed in the relevant column exceeding speeds for pressures tire the note the door post when you open the driver's door. These pressure specifications can befound on comfort. km/hto achieve optimum driving mph/160 100 column for traveling speeds up to max.a of pressures listed onthe following pages in the inflation tire respective tothe pressures adjust km/h, mph/160 100 up to normal driving For km/h mph/160 100 to up Tire inflation pressures for driving age and accidents may result. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise, tire dam- bv 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 above 100 Tire inflation pressures for driving xeso 0 p/6 km/h, please mph/160 of100 excess In order to drive at maximum speeds in nlto rsue s10mh10km/h. mph/160 inflation pressures is 100 The permissible top speed forthese tire < < More details onthe permissible load and weights can be foundonpage Rear: W 91 20 275/30R2093Y R 245/35 Front: Rear: W 94 19 275/35R1996W R 245/40 Front: Rear: W 96 18 R 275/40R1899W 245/45 Front: M+S H 99 17 R 245/50 M+S V 96 18 R 245/45 temperature =ambient Cold psi/kilopascal with cold tires. in tableindicatedthe are in specifications pressure All More details onthe permissible load and weights can be foundonpage Rear: W 91 20 275/30R2093Y R 245/35 Front: Rear: W 94 19 275/35R1996W R 245/40 Front: Rear: W 96 18 R 275/40R1899W 245/45 Front: M+S H 99 17 R 245/50 M+S V 96 18 R 245/45 temperature =ambient Cold psi/kilopascal with cold tires. in tableindicatedthe are in specifications pressure All Tireinflation pressuresConvertible for650i Tire size Tireinflation pressuresCoupe for650i Tire size 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 2203/3 2203/3 32039/270 33/230 39/270 33/230 33/230 32/220 39/270 33/230 33/230 33/230 32/220 32/220 39/270 33/230 33/230 33/230 32/220 32/220 33/230 33/230 32/220 32/220 33/230 32/220 2203/7 2203/6 92046/320 39/270 38/260 46/320 32/220 39/270 38/260 46/320 39/270 32/220 39/270 32/220 38/260 46/320 38/260 32/220 39/270 32/220 38/260 38/260 32/220 32/220 38/260 32/220 Traveling speeds Traveling speeds up of tomax. up of tomax. Pressure specificationspsi/kPa in Pressure specifications in psi/kPa in specifications Pressure including those exceeding including those exceeding 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 Traveling speeds Traveling speeds 237 237 . . 211

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Wheels and tires (in ZR tires before R) (inthe before tires ZR Speed codeletter (not in ZR tires) Carrying capacity ID-code inches in diameter Rim Belted –radialconstruction ratio Aspect in Nominalmm width in e.g. Speed letter Speed Tire size tires. itmakes easier to identify and choose the right Knowledge the of labeling on the side the of tire Tire identification marks 0years. 10 years, even if some tires may last for every 6 all replacing tires at least recommends BMW of2007. 33 week in factured thatthe indicates was tire manu- 3307 ... DOT sidewall: the ofmanufacture tire's date isThe indicated on Tire age Tire age Tire size and tire design make tire for Manufacturer code e.g. DOT code: ofTransportation. USDepartment the Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of Tire Identification Number km/h mph/300 to186 =up Y km/h mph/270 W = up to 167 km/h mph/240 =up 150 to V km/h mph/210 to131 =up H km/h mph/190 T = up to 118 212 Ξ DOT xxxx xxx 3307 4/5R1 6W 96 18 R 245/45 ferences in road characteristics and climate. and road characteristics in ferences dif- and practices service habits, driving in tions due tovaria- significantly from norm the depart conditions of their use, however, and may performance of tires uponthe depends actual ment course atireas graded Therelative 100. 1 one-half, and For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one ernment test course. under controlled conditions on a specified gov- on of the tested rate when wear tire the based rating acomparative grade is tread wear The Tread wear thesegrades.to Temperature A BC C AAAB Traction Tread wear DOT QualityGrades Temperature A Tread wear 200 Traction AA example: maximum section width. For on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and Quality grades can befoundwhere applicable Uniform TireQuality Grading teristics. nering, hydroplaning, or tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cor- traction performance. poor have may C marked tire A and concrete. asphalt of faces sur- test government specified on conditions on wet pavement as measured under controlled These grades represent the tire's ability to stop AA, A, B, and C. are from highest traction grades, The to lowest, Traction Federal Safety Requirements in addition in addition Requirements Safety Federal to conform must tires car passenger All based on straight-ahead braking tractionbraking straight-ahead on based this tire is to assigned grade traction The < γ < , times well, times govern-as onthe peak traction charac- peak buildup and possible tire failure. arately orin combination, can cause heat sep- either loading, excessive or underinflation, speed, Excessive not overloaded. and inflated required bylaw. thanthe wheel minimum test laboratory represent higher levels of performance on the cle SafetyStandardNo.109. Grades B andA under thetires must meet Vehi- Federal Motor a level of performance which all passenger car sudden tire failure. Thegrade Ccorresponds to tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to material ofthe tire andreduce todegenerate Sustained high temperature can cause the wheel. test laboratory indoor specified a on heat when tested under controlled conditions dissipate to ability its and heat of generation and C,representing tothe the resistance tire's The temperature grades are theA, highest, B, Temperature water are present on the road surface. of amounts only small hydroplaning, even when mm, there is an increased risk of high-speed 3 in/ 0.12 below depths Attread mm. in/1.6 0.063 tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of although, for mm, example, European legisla- 3 The tread depth should notdrop below 0.12 in/ Minimum tread depth tread,the and check the depth.tread signs ofdamage and foreign objects lodged in your tread frequently tires for Inspect wear, Tire condition mer tires. These have better winter properties than sum- tires. all-season and Winter M+S of the tire, refer to page containingsymbol the ontheletters RSC side You will recognize run-flat tires bya circular tires run-flat – RSC established established atire thatisfor properly for temperature grade The this tire is 214 . < and other road users. road other and be extremely dangerous to vehicle occupants can damage tire Otherwise, necessary. if shop thepersonnel. vehicle repair the Have to towed BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained ized tire dealer that works in accordance with drive center tothe or BMW a nearest special- inspected immediately. To do this, carefully topulltendency tothe left right. or strong as a such response, vehicle in changes kinds of problems may also be signaled by other ple, becaused by driving over curbs. These some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam- vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or Unusual vibrations encountered during normal ages. tible toroad and consequentialhazards dam- suscep- more be to parts suspension and tires that Please note cause tires low-profile wheels, Wheel/tire damage reached. beenhas mm in/1.6 tread depth of 0.063 has been driven down to the wear indicators, a Indicator.the If tire Wear tread – Tread with TWI ference and are marked on the side of the tire to arrow, distributedare the over tire's circum- Wear refer indicators at the base, tread-groove safety. be in tires should mounted the New interest of mm. in/4 winter use below a tread depthof 0.16 Winter tires noticeably loose their suitability for diately and have the wheels and tires In these cases reduce your speed imme- < 213

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Wheels and tires can result in a reduced service life. tions in in designtions the and may bereduced. Potentially substantial varia- bal- are wheels anced.new the that sure Make hazards. ger ofsubsequent andrelateddamage safety dan- a is there properly, out carried not is work appropriatelyuses trained personnel. If this worksin accordance guidelines with BMW and Run-flat tires Retreaded tires wheels and New tires > To continue driving with a damaged tire: degree. restricted a to possible remains safety in the event of pressure drop and driving residual thatthe some retains tire ensures special rims.The sidewall reinforcement tires and ofself-contained consist tires Run-flat tire. the of containing letterssymbol the onthe RSC side You will recognize run-flat tires by the circular > a flat tire, tire, a flat page Indication of to refer Tire Monitor, Flat With page pressure, inflation tire low with sage With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes- retreaded tires; otherwise, driving safety not recommenddoes BMW the use of by aBMWcenter or a repair shop that Only have newwheels and tires mounted < 92 214 90 the age of the carcasses thethe of age < vehicle as soon possible.as andtirewheel combination remounted onthe damaged, always remember to have the original is tire a After manufacturer. single a from uration only ofasingle tires config- use tread response, vehicle and handling good maintain To and DSC. ABS as vehiclesuch ofvarious systems tion vital in reliable factor ensuring another opera- The right wheel-and-tire combination is yourtion from BMWcenter. canfindYou outthe right combina- wheel-tire safety. and therefore cannot be held liable for driving their suitability, cannotevaluate BMW used, non-approveddents.If wheels tires and are acci- severe of risk the it with and contact, body approved units – these differences could lead to thantheactually different have dimensions could ratings officialsize identical with tires turing tolerances mean that even wheels and vehicle.manufac- Variationsfactorssuch as in tested has and approved foryour particular The right The wheels and tires happy to advise you on you toadvise this subject. on happy refer topage cannotdetectTire Pressure aflat Monitor tire, wheels electronics, with TPM otherwise the summer towinter tires or vice versa, only use converting or tires from mounting new When Monitor Pressure Tire TPM for electronics with Wheels wheel and tire combinations that BMW BMW that combinations tire and wheel BMW recommends that you use only < 90 . Your BMW center . BMW bewill Your dents. tire may damage occur, which can resultacci- in Recommended tire brands Watch speed winter tires. same levels cold-weather of performance as tires, they generally failsummer the toprovide tires better provide winterM+S traction than winter driving conditions. Although all-season BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold Special characteristics of winter tires damage. consequential of occurrences out rule to possible isnot it wise shou they repaired; tires be glad toadvise you. vided inthe eventof a flat. Your BMWcenter will safety, use run-flat tires. No spare wheel is pro- tires towinter your for own tires, summer from When installing newtires or whenchanging Run-flat tires tics. standards for safety and handling characteris- With proper use, these tires meet the highest clearly visible BMWmarking on the tire sidewall. each tiresize.You can recognize thesethe from BMW recommends particular tire brands for ble speed for the winter tires, otherwise Always observe the maximum permissi- that youdonothave damaged run-flat recommends BMW reasons, safety For < < ld bereplaced. Other- change is notpermissible. tical to briefly activate topage tical tobriefly refer activate DTC, When driving with snow chains, it may beprac- Flatthe Tire Monitor to malfunction. with km/h the mounted. chains mph/50 of 30 mounting chains.snow Donotexceed a speed Observe the manufacturer's instructions when > > size: tire the with wheels rear onthe pairs in use These snow chains are approved exclusively for mation. infor- more for center BMW your Consult them. recommends and road-safe as them classifies BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains, Snow chains* types and makes different of tires With the handling characteristics may be impaired. wheels totherear or vice otherwise versa, as front the recommendmoving not does BMW Rotating wheels axlesbetween tire.the inflationpressure indicatedside wall the of on and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire all contact oil,protect tires greaseagainst with tolight little Always exposure possible. as as Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with Storage 245/45 R 18 Y 18 R 245/45 Y 17 R 245/50 installing snow chains as this could cause cause this could as chains snow installing notinitializeDo the Tire Flat after Monitor 215 * such a such 88 . <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Under the hood improperly. ated safety risks if this work is performed wise, there is a danger of damage and associ- appropriatelyuses trained personnel. Other- worksin accordance guidelines with BMW and vehicle by a BMWcenter or a repair shop that only work have outonyourcarried observed, to be the with specifications are unfamiliar you the required professional technical training. If Under thehood Press the release handle and open the hood. Opening Pull lever. Releasing Hood repair operations onyour vehicle without service or any toperform attempt Never < 216 you should stop at onceand close it securely. pletely closed whileyouare driving yourvehicle, thatthe If you signs is notcom- any hood see result. engage. to cmwith momentum. It must beclearly heard 40 in/ from hood a the height ofapprox. Close 16 Closing hood hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may the of path closing the that sure Make < Engine compartment 2 1 4 3 Jump-starting terminal, refer topage terminal, Jump-starting engine oil Filler spout for engine oil, refer to Adding Expansion tankfor page and windshield cleaning systems, refer to Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp page 65 219 . coolant, refer to 228 217

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Under the hood 3. 2. 1. pr operating iDrive, for surface with the engine running. play while driving or when stopped on a level You can display the oil level on the Control Dis- miles/10 km. uninterruptedan drive of at least 6 engine at operating temperature, i.e. following with the measurement is possible oil level the of The condition for the most accurate indication level check. Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil Checking engine oillevel conditions. driving and style Engine oil consumption depends ondriving Engine oil 5. 4. selected and press the controller. the press and selected Turn the controller until "Info sources" is menu. button. Press the controller to open the This opens the start menu. the Press selected and press the controller. the press and selected controller until "Service requirements" is fieldto upper ifnecessary. Change Turnthe controller. the press and selected Turn the controller until "Service" is 218 inciple refer topage 16 . > > > > > Possible messages 6. system checkedsoon as possible. as Service requirements on page to service, refer change nextuntilthe oil age drive, note the recalculated remaining mile- oil. engine Beforecontinuingnot add to Do for val oil": engine "Please observe recalculated service inter- result if muchtoo oil has been added. high": too level oil "Engine damage. lead engine to may engineadd oil immediately. so Failure do to If the oil level displayed is below minimum, correctly. level control may not display the newvalue liter. Otherwise the oil quart/0.5 US 0.5 Adding engine oil below. Addat least engine oil at the next liter of US quart/1 Add a maximum 1 of of engine oil.": "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart minutes. 30 up to take can oil level the of measurement topped If theoff, the oil engine been has ing. minutes while driv- running and approx. 5 surface levelstoppeda onengine with the minute when process cantakeapprox. 1 Engine oil level is being measured. This oilengine level measurement...": measurement"No available: Updating O.K." level oil "Engine ler. The oil level is displayed. oil level" is selected and press the control- necessary. Turn the controller until "Engine tothe Change thesecond field from topif ately;otherwise, engine may damage Have the vehicle checked immedi- opportunity, referto 77 . Have the . Have < do so could pose health risks. health pose could so do and observe warnings on containers. Failure to etc. oil,Keep outofreach of grease, children work. after such and water soap with of skin For this reason,thoroughly wash exposed areas Adding engineoil use oils of the specification API or SM higher. other synthetic oils between oil changes. Only of quantities small you add can unavailable, HighIf BMW Performance Synthetic Oil is Synthetic Oil. Only use approved BMW High Performance in its vehicles with extensive testing. use for suitability their confirming after oils cific an engine. BMW continuously approves spe- significance for the operation and service life of The quality of the engine oil selected has critical oils Approved engine trained personnel. with BMWguidelines and appropriately uses or in center that arepairaccordance shop works oil carried changes Have outonly aBMW by Oil change aged. play. Dis- Control the on shown is message sponding ofoil until quart/liter acorre- US notadd1 Do < caused cancer in laboratory testing. Continuous exposure toused oil has otherwise the engine could be dam- km, miles/200 125 next the within oil Add < posing of used coolant additives. coolant ofused posing hazard. health a present additives. suitable for center BMW your Ask BMW. for your suitable are additives available Notall commercially additive. coolant a and water parts of equal composed is Coolant burns. you normally drive your BMW. which in region the in conditions climatic the The choice theof right SAE grade is based on the oil and is specified in SAE grades. The viscosity is a measure theof thickness of Viscosity grades Coolant These oils can beused allat temperatures. engine. www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information. at website the visit or 1-800-831-1117 at America North of BMW call also can You oils. mance Synthetic Oil or syntheticapproved < mental lawsregulations and when dis- all applicable observe environ- Always engine damage may result. The additives otherwise additives, suitable use Only enginecoolant canhot. Escapingcause is Do not open the cooling system when the 5W-40 and 5W-30. Approved oils belongtothe SAE grades cumstances, they can damage your your can damage they cumstances, Do notuse oil additives; under some cir- High questions Perfor-detailed on BMW Your BMWcenter will be happyto answer < < < < 219 <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Under the hood Checking coolantlevel 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. nated as soon as as possible. as soon nated elimi- the loss for the coolant reason Have Turn the cap until it clicks. the specified level – do not overfill. to up add coolant slowly is low, coolant If the next drawing to the tothe filler neck. refer also mark, andMAX MIN the between lies it when correct is level coolant The open. then toescape, continuesure turning to pres- accumulated any toallow clockwise tankcounter- expansion cap ofthe theTurn down. cooled the notopen Do hooduntil the engine has 220 > > > BMW Maintenance System Maintenance BMW Maintenance deadlines, refer to page maintenance intervals and legally mandated ofselected times and distances remaining show to Display Control the set can You the basis for trouble-free driving. own individual requirements, the system builds and maintenance regimen thatreflects your requirements. By letting you define a service determine currentthe andfuture service to this uses Service Based Condition account. into BMW your of conditions driving ent differ- the take algorithms special and Sensors ConditionCBS Based Service service history is an asset of inestimable value. dealer complete a that find will you BMW, your Should the day come when you decide tosell your vehicle. maintenance byproviding the ideal service for ultimate objective is to ensure economical The replacement of the filters for the inside air. comfort and convenience features, such as includes operations vehicle'srelated tothe of your BMW. The service schedule also traffic safety and ofthe preservation operating The BMWMaintenance System supports the Brake fluid front separately rear and pads, Brake Engine oil 77 : ensured. isnot Service Based Condition CBS of Advisor the remote control last used todrive control used last the it. Advisor remote in for service,youshouldService givethe BMW this reason,you take when yourvehicle cle.For service proceduresfor your own individualvehi- Advisor suggestprecisely can the rightarray of stored inthe remote control,Service your BMW trol during driving. accessing After data the maintenance continuously in the remote con- Your vehicle stores the information required for Service data in remote control fied regular maintenance. verify that your vehicle has received the speci- Booklet for Canadian models. These entries for US modelsWarranty and and Service Guide cle's Serviceand Warranty Information Booklet cedures are confirmed byentries in your vehi- service thatthese pro- time toensure the Take BMW center. ments. for additional information on service require- and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models andWarranty USmodels Booklet for mation Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor- for Canadian models and Service Guide Booklet Warranty BookletUS for models and Information Warranty and Service > > regulations Legally required tests depending onlocal Vehicle check to page correctly, set is therefer date sure Make and repair operations performed at your atyour performed repair and operations yourecommends have that service BMW < 83 , otherwise the effectiveness 221 <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Maintenance should go out within gooutwithin days.should a few light tightened, display capis the then up.Ifthe escape of fuel vapor. This causes a display to time. short a within converter, catalytic the cially emission-relevant theto components,espe- Heavy engine misfiring causes serious damage the nearest centerBMW soon as possible. as this case, youshouldspeed reduce and driveto In engine. of the misfiring ofexcessive asign is This conditions. certain under flashes lamp The possible. Diagnostics interface Socket for OBDOnboard Exhaust-gas values instrument panel. side of the driver's footwell, directly under the This socket is located under a cover on the left the OBD socket with a device. exhaust-gas composition can bechecked via Components which are decisive for the ened, the OBD system can detect the If the fuel filler capis not tight-properly malfunction on Canadian models. Canadian on malfunction Display of the previously described Have the vehicle checked soonas as exhaust-gas valuesare deteriorating. The warning lamp lights up. The 222 < vehicle brochure. contained yourof BMW is in the Caring for your Important information on careandmaintenance Care corresponding services. enable to recorded or transmitted be can data vehicle certain then Assist, toBMW scribed vehicle data or information. If youhave also sub- device for recording or transmitting certain a or with modules, diagnosis and measuring eral Your vehicle may be equipped with oneor sev- dataEvent recorders Onboard tool kit Onboard tool Replacing components 3. 2. 1. blades Replacing wiper under the floor compartment mat. tool onboard is The kit in located the luggage until it audibly clicks into place. into clicks audibly it until Insert the new wiper blade and slide it in engage it. ing wiper the front the blade todis- toward the Press together whilelocking tabs slid- Fold the wiper arm outandgrasp it firmly. ter. cen- your BMW contact aim, please headlamp Caring for your vehicle brochure. separate the in instructions the follow lamps, When performing maintenance on the head- turer. instructions provided by the bulb manufac- ment damagewhen replacing bulbs, follow any equip- or injury possible avoid To occurring. circuits short from toprevent devices involved center.your BMW selectionA replacement of bulbsavailable is at metal socket. clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its bulb's surface reduce and itsservice life. Use a into the will burn ofcontamination amounts work carried outatyour BMWcenter. specified procedures, have the corresponding the with not familiar areyou If them. replacingin diligent duly be must You safety. todriving tion contribu- essential an make bulbs and Lamps Lamps andbulbs hours, asirritation could retina hours, result. ofthe emitting diodes. light- 1 as Class designated officially are lasers, concept similar tothatapplied in conventional light-emitting diodes, which operate using a the controls and displays in your vehicle. These cent lenses serve as the light source for many of Light-emitting diodes behind installed translu- Light-emitting diodes LEDs < < described, and for checking and adjusting not is changing which for bulbs For electrical system, turn off the electrical Whenever you perform any work on the your bare fingers, as evenminute with onnew the bulbs Never touch glass stare into the unfiltered light for several notremoveDo thecovers, and never < 223 <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Replacing components ing replacement. injuries if the bulb is accidentally damaged dur- pressurized. Otherwise, there is a danger of out improperly. ais danger life to whenwork limb and is carried sonnel. Due to the high voltage involved, there procedures with correspondingly trained per- workshop that works according to BMWrepair this. prohibit not areavided traffic do in your laws ing with great caution using the lamps, pro-fog nevertheless fail, it is possible to continue driv- times.number of one thesebulbsshould of If onand off an unusual are they not switched that the probability of a failure is very low, provided The service life of these lamps is very long and lampsXenon 3. 2. 1. 8 bulb, H 35-watt engine compartment. the left side front illustration ofthe The shows lamps, daytimerunning lamps Parking lamps, roadside parking Remove and replace the bulb. Turn theholder bulb left to the remove. and and removing thecover capupward. theRemove cover cap the atmosphere inside the H8 bulb is Alwaysgloves wear eyeprotection and – performed only performed only your center a by or BMW Have workonthe xenon lighting system 224 < < 1 by pressing the tab 4 3 2 1 malfunction. a of life bulbs. Please contact BMWcenter a incase ogy. The backup lamps are equipped with long- 3. 2. 1. bulb, WY5W 5-watt Side-mounted turn signals Tail lamps Backup lamp Reflector parking,Roadside tail andbrake lamp Turn signals Remove and replace the bulb. remove. Turn bulbthe tothe holder left 90 by it andtake front offthe trim strip. atthe snapconnection the release rear, tipwith the ofyour finger, pushitthen tothe ofthe front lamp the edge against Press lamps, and turn signals use LED technol- The parking lamps, tail lamps, brake < 5 and 3. plate License lamps center. > To continue driving with damageda tire: required. in the event of a flat tire is therefore no longer change wheel immediate An feature. standard Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as a Changing wheels 2. 1. W5W bulb, 5-watt Also refer to New wheels and tires, page you. advise case ofaflat.Your BMWcenter will beglad to flat tires because no spare tire is provided in run- use versa, vice or tires, winter to summer If you have new tires orswitchmounted from tire, onpage tires of the toRun-flat refer containingsymbol the ontheletters RSC side You will recognize run-flat tires bya circular > Remove Remove and replace the bulb. remove. a flat tire,a flat page With Tire Flat Monitor, toIndicationrefer of Turn bulb the tothe holder left 90 by andprylamp outthe toward right.the lamp Push a screwdriver from the left under the page sage with low tire inflation pressure, WithPressure Tire Monitor,refer Mes- to available as accessories from your BMW BMW your from as accessories available are tires changing for tools suitable The < 92 90 214 5 214 and and . . ping over during transport. ping over the secure to battery Always it prevent from tip- storage. for and anupright transport position in atarecyclingthem center. battery Maintain the matters concerningmatters battery. the Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all mate. when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli- electrolyte will last for the life of the battery maintenance-free, i.e., theThe battery is 100% Maintenance Vehicle battery shown. positions the in located are jack car the for points jacking The Car jacking points Disposal starting onpage to Jump refer off. the connections, switched For engine with the in engine the terminals compartment chargeOnly the battery thein vehicle the via Charging battery posed ofbyyour BMWcenter or deposit dis- batteries old have replacement, After 225 228 < .

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Replacing components kit, refer to page to refer kit, tool onboard the for compartment the in located Spare fuses and a pair of plastic tweezers are vehicle. the in fire a in resulting mately this could leadoverloading to the ofwiring, ulti- rating, as amperage ofanother color or stitute the bracket thethe for kit, tool onboard below. see Information on fuse allocation is located below > > > > steps: following the Take lost. are settings some interruption, supply power atemporary After Power failure 2. 1. compartment glove In Fuses page refer untilto Wait thestarts, system system Navigation topage refer again, stations Store Radio Reset, refer onpage totext starting Reset, date Time and fold the lid the refer again, Store positions to page Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory Press the coupling downward, arrow arrow partition thePress button on the back in the center of do not replace a defective fuse with asub- with fuse adefective notreplace do ablown torepair fuse, and attempt Never 132 2 . 226 1 . and pull out thepartitionpullupward, out and 4 forward. 223 . < 164 82 3 , and , and . . 49 . Information on fuse onfuse allocation Information the tool bracket onboard the remove for kit. underthefloorand cover Fold the upward mat luggageIn compartment fuses 2 are provided there. 1 and additional at a BMW center. at aBMW after anewreactivated concluding agreement be can system Assist BMW The made. be can requests emergency no system, Assist BMW the of deactivation Following workshop. a visit center you BMW by to vated without having a expires, the BMW Assist system can be deacti- Assist BMW for contract service your Once > > > > > Conditions for an emergency request: request Emergency and receivingassistance Giving 1. request an emergency Initiating 2. ble. The emergency request system is opera- mobile phone network. The AssistBMW system is logged on to a activated. is readiness Radio topage refer Assist, BMW Activating activated. is Assist BMW paired in the vehicle. is still possible when nomobile phoneis With this equipment, an emergency request Full preparation packagemobile phone. somewhat. switches and indicator lamps may differ in the Convertible, the arrangement of the With some vehicle equipment packages or Briefly press protective cover toopen. 2seconds. buttonfor the Press at SOS least 204 . page tions. cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi- For technical reasons, the emergency request pressed. thenotification is not by buttonbeing affected collision automatic The accident. asevere after request initiatedis automatically immediately emergencyconditions,Under certain an Center, however. Response Assist BMW the by heard be still may You malfunctioning. is system hands-free hands-free system, it is possible that the Response Center cannot beheard over the Assist BMW flashing is If thebut the LED Center. Response Assist determined, will it be tothetransmitted BMW If the current ofyourposition vehicle can be situation.the then ablebe toprovide a descriptiondetailed of the connection has been established. You will until vehicle the in remain allow, conditions If you. tohelp steps additional for arranges and you contacts Center Response Assist BMW the Center, Response Assist BMW When the emergency request is received at the Center has been established, the LED flashes. Response Assist BMW the to connection voice The LED in buttonligh the LED The 199 BMW Assist with button,refer this to Assist BMW You can also use other services of . < 227 ts up. As soon as the the as As soon up. ts

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Giving and receiving assistance you donotdamage therear seat upholstery. filler element back into place. Make sure that Warning triangle*Warning 1. backrest. seat rear the of fillerelement thekit in located is first-aid The First-aid kit* inside compartment. the luggage The warning triangle is locatedtheleft-hand on 2. filler element forward. button andpull the Press downward the Take outfirst-aidTake kit. bottom tabs into the strip and press the the the tabsinto strip press and bottom two the filler insert the To refit element, 228 < refer topage the event of a breakdown directly via iDrive, in for assistance Group BMW ofthe Assistance Roadside the contact can you Assist BMW With directory. Contact BMW countryinfoundbetance inthe yourhome can The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis- days. clock, including on weekends andpublic holi- around the in eventtance ofabreakdown the assis- you offers Assistance Roadside BMW Roadside Assistance* 3. 2. 1. Preparing personal injuries. possible against guard to both vehicles, and or to one damage prevent fully adhere tothe bothto sequence, following whilecomponents the engine is running. Care- handles. clamp fully-insulated another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with tohelp start method same use the can also from batteryin vehicle. the asecond Youpower with your tostart cables jumper BMW two When your battery is discharged, youcan use Jump starting have passed. expiration dates whose replace any and larly regu- ofthe ofeach expiration dates the items check reason, this For life. service a limited have of the articlesSome contained in the first-aid kit ponents inboth vehicles. Switch off any electrical systems and com- assistance. ing engineSwitch offthe the vehicleof provid- tery. This information can be found on the bat- Ah. in capacitance same approximately the Volts and voltage 12 a of vehicle has Check whether the battery of the other always avoid all contact with electrical electrical with all contact avoid always injury, fatal ofpotentially the avoid risk To 200 . < 1. page on overview toengine refer compartment also for battery, the as a positive terminal serves compartment engine the in starting jump for nal In the jump-starting BMW, so-called termi- your jumper cables. there is a danger of short circuiting. 4. 3. 2. Connecting jumper cables jumper Connecting starting terminal. To do so, Todoso, pullstarting the terminal. tab. jump- cover ofthe the Fold open BMW or negative terminal. negative or has Your a BMW special nut as bodyground providing assistance. an engine or body ground of the vehicle or battery terminal ofthe to the to negative Attach one endof the jumper cable minus/– started. be to vehicle the of terminal starting to ajump- or the battery of positive terminal second ofthe the totheAttach end cable assistance. ing provid- vehicleof the terminal jump-starting a or battery ofthe terminal the positive to Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+ 217 low this sequence when connectinglowsequence this when fol- sparks, from personal injury To avoid the bodies theof two vehicles; otherwise, There must not beany contact between h oe a smre iha+. . Thecover cap is marked with a < < towed. Check the battery and recharge if necessary. recharge battery and the Check 4. 3. 2. 1. engine Starting the tow tow the fitting and vehicle damaged. can be fitting. Otherwise, tow the lift by vehicle the not loading lateral ofthe Avoid fitting, do tow e.g. roads. only on towing fitting for tow the Use ble. in screwed at front the BMW. rearor ofthe should always remain in the vehicle. It canbe refer under the topage ment floor mat, on mounted the inside ofthe luggage compart- kit tool in the stored is fitting tow threaded The Using tow fitting Tow-starting andtowing 5. the connection sequence. Disconnect the jumper cables byreversing run the fewLet for minutes. engines a recharge. in discharged order battery toallow to the attempt another before minutes few a wait not successful, is attempt starting first If the usual way. theStart engine onthe vehicleother in the at slightly increased speed. minutes several for idle at run to it allow and vehicle theStart onthe engine assisting started. engine or body ground of the vehicle tobe ofthe tothe battery or negative terminal second ofthe the totheAttach end cable than the driver in a vehicle that is being other passengers any transport not Do towing. and tow-starting for regulations and laws applicable Observe engine. the fluids tostart use spray Never the vehicle and screw it in as far as asfar possi- as itin screw and vehicle the with fitting the thatcomes tow use Only < < 229 < 223 , and , and <

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Giving and receiving assistance a a sign orwarning triangle in therear window. mark fails, vehiclethe tem towed, with tobe e.g. the localing on regulations.If the electrical sys- Switch on thehazard warning flashers depend- required. vated larger and steering wheel movements are steering steering.Activebraking and deacti- is for effort increased then requires This assist. When the engine is stopped, there is no power the steering canturnwise left tothe or right. the vehicle with the rear axle raised, as other- be not would wipers shield wind- and signals turn lights, tail headlamps, Being towed Rear Front bumper. in onthe thecover symbol arrow the Press Access toscrewthread refer topage on, switched ignitionthat the sure is Make < 230 58 ; otherwise, the low-beam low-beam the ; otherwise, available. Do not tow tow not Do available. matic transmission may be damaged. auto- the otherwise, sport km; miles/150 90 lead to damage. respective country. respective yourselfize with the regu ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiar- or bars tow with towing countries, some In may result. referlock, to page transmission locking and unlocking Manually cally beengaged during towing. will lock automati- thatthea transmission risk function in the there transmission. Otherwise is > > angle, please note the following: atanoffset the bar tow ble mounting to avoid side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi- should onthe fittingsbe used tow same The response. will not be possible to reliably control vehicle Towing methods Sport automatic transmission Gearshift lever in neutral position. transmission Manual With tow bar vehicle sideways. lateral exert tending topushthe forces, When mounted atangle, an the tow bar will be strictly limited during cornering. Clearance and maneuvering capability will 70 km/h and a towing distance atowing and distance of km/h 70 mph/ notDo exceed a towing speed of 45 as attachmentas toother vehicle parts can only, the fittings tow the to bar tow Attach and chassis parts; otherwise, damage damage otherwise, parts; chassis and not liftDo vehicle fitting tow by body or transmission lock,there evenifno mal- is the release manually towing, Before than the vehicle to towed;be otherwise, it towing The vehicle lighternot be may < < < 62 . lations on intowing the < < 6. 5. 4. 3. damage. toother vehicle attachment to parts can lead only, to the as fittings tow ropes tow Attach towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. that ropesure tow is taut. the the make off starting towing in vehicle, When With towrope 2. 1. tow-starting. started by not be the transmission, can- engine automatic sport when the engine is cold. Whenequipped with a catalytic converter only tow-started should be ing, refer topage start- jump of means by engine the start instead vehicle the nottow-start ifDo but possible, Tow-starting lift or bed. bar aso-called with a flat on truck with atow transported the Have BMW With towtruck Have the vehicle checked. flashers. ing bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn- the remove tow location, Stop atasuitable depress the clutch again completely. immediately the starts, engine After depressed slowlyclutch. release and the clutch withTow-start the completely Shift 3rd into gear. Switch onthe ignition, refer to page comply with country-specific regulations. Switch onthe hazard warning flashers, stresses on vehicle components when and associated jerking the To avoid < 228 . Vehicles equipped with a 58 . 231

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance

Reference

This chapter contains the technical data, the short commands of the voice command system, and the index that will direct you as quickly as possible to the information you are looking for. Technical data tegn pe p 3,400 6,300 360 360/488 rpm ft/Nm lb rpm hp speed engineat torque Maximum cu in/cm speed engineat Maximum output No. of cylinders Displacement Engine data Technical data 234 μ 292.8/4,799 650i 8 Coupe Dimensions l iesosgvni nhsm.Sals unn iceda. 74f/14m ft/11.4 All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 37.4 235

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Technical data Convertible l iesosgvni nhsm.Sals unn iceda. 74f/14m ft/11.4 All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 37.4 236 Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18. approx. gal/liters US Fuel tank wiper system US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5 approx. quarts/liters US approx. 2.6/10 gal/liters US system wiper Window andheadlamp including reserve of: odls/g8830772/350 838/380 10.6/300 2,778/1,260 4,277/1,940 2,403/1,090 2,491/1,130 15.9/450 lbs./kg 3,814/1,730 2,337/1,060 5,049/2,290 lbs./kg lbs./kg lbs./kg cuft/l 4,652/2,110 > Luggage compartment capacity lbs./kg load axle rear Approved load front axle Approved Load weight vehicle gross Approved weight Curb Weights Capacities the gross vehicle weight. Never exceed either the approved axle loads or compartment floor, refer topage floor, refer compartment with raised convertible top 35 uf/ 12.4/350 – ft/l cu /0Fuel specification: page 5/70 650iCoupe 237 For details: page 650i Convertible 650i Notes 209 65

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Short commands of voice command system Communication window assistance the in display the select To Assistance window selected. is item menu which of regardless directly, tions shortWith commands youcanrun certain func- system command of voice Short commands To activate telephone activate To To open the assistance window To dial phone number dial phoneTo To To display "Top 8" book phone from dial To the book To phone display To redial To To To display "Received calls" To change scale in assistance inwindow assistance scale To change To display "Bluetooth" display To To display "Missed calls" To open BMW Service, Services Service, BMW open To To open BMW Assist Assist BMW open To To open "BMW Contact" "BMW To open To open "Roadside Assistance" "Roadside open To ContactNumbers" To "BMW open Function Function 193 238 * 193 191 199 191 185 192 193 193 192 193 20 200 199 201 132 20 { { system. command voice for the short are the Here commands important { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { Command Command Assistance windowfacing map north Assistance window map direction of travel Assistance window Dial number Dial Phone Assistance window currentposition Assistance window perspective Assistance window arrowdisplay Top 8 name Dial Call ... Assistance window trip computer A toZ Assistance window onboard info Redial Received calls Assistance window scale ... miles ... scale window Assistance feet ... scale window Assistance Bluetooth Missed calls BMW Service BMW BMW Assist Roadside Assistance Roadside BMW Contact BMW BMW Contact numbers Contact BMW } } } } } or } } } } } } } } } } } } } } , or } } } , or } } , , } , To display current position current display To To openroute instructions voice repeat To To switch off voice instructions voice off switch To To switch on voice instructions voice on switch To To display streets and towns/cities of the route To change scale To change To display viewmap To display arrow display To end destination guidance destination end To To start destination guidance To display the route criteria To display the address book To display destination list To display "Input map" To open "New destination" To deactivate limit To deactivate speed speed limit To activate To set the speed limit stopwatch the To start To display tripthe computer To open "Enter address" To display the computer Onboard info Onboard To opennavigation Navigation To open"Car Data" Function Function 132 76 81 81 82 76 81 76 { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { Command Command Current position Current Route menu navigation info Repeat Navigation info off info Navigation Navigation info on info Navigation Route list Scale ... Scale feet ... Scale miles Perspective Map direction of travel Map Arrow display Stop guidance Stop Start guidance Route preference Address book Address Destination list Input map New destination Limit off Limit on Stopwatch Trip computer Onboard info Enter address Limit Car data Navigation } } , { Map facing north Map } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } or } } } } } } } } or 239 } ,

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Short commands of voice command system To To switch on satellite radio "SAT" open To To open "Categories" ofsatellite radio "Categories" To open To open "All channels" of satellite radio radio ofsatellite "Presets" open To To To select CD changer To switch onCD player To select CD player To To select a CD in the CDchanger To switch onCD changer To To select music track changer To select a CD and music track in the CD device audio external with onaudio playback To switch Tone control Tone Entertainment To open "AM" open To "FM" open To To switch onradio To open "Manual" open To "Presets" open To To To open "All stations" To To select preset radio station To select the radio station reception radio the To stationopen with best the To open "WB" open To To To switch onweatherband To select a weatherband station aweatherband To select Function 178 173 164 240 159 162 162 166 170 163 162 162 172 173 173 162 172 173 162 170 166 162 166 173 171 170 170 { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { Command SAT radio menu SAT radio all channels SAT radio presets SAT radio SAT radio categories CD menu CD changer menu CD CD changer CD 1...6 CD CD track ... track CD Audio Aux CD 1...6 track ... track 1...6 CD Audio AM FM on Radio AM menu AM FM menu FM presets station Choose FM All stations Preset ... AM presets AM manual AM FM manual Station ... Station AM Autostore AM Frequency ...Megahertz frequency Choose Weatherband menu Weatherband Weatherband on Weatherband Choose weatherband station weatherband Choose } } } or } } } } } } } } , e.g. , e.g. , } } , e.g. , e.g. } } } } } } , or or } } { } } { Preset 1 } Station WNYC } } } } , } } } } } } } , or To display settings for BMW Night Night BMW Vision for To display settings To display To display "Bluetooth" To deactivate BMW Night Vision BMW To deactivate To activate BMW Night Vision BMW To activate To open"TPM" To open"FTM" To open"PDC" To open"Date" To open "Time" To open "Languages" To open To open"Units" Display ControlTo adjust ofthe brightness the To open "Head-Up Display" To display "Check Control messages" To open "BMW Service settings" settings Service settings" "BMW To open To open "Service" To open "Service requirements" To open "Steering wheel buttons" To open"Lighting" To open "Door locks" "Door To open To display activationTo display the times To open "Settings" To open "Automatic ventilation" To open "Infosources" To open To open "Parked car ventilation" programs" "Automatic To open "Display off" "Display To open "Vent settings" "Vent To open Climate ooe h menu To open the Function Function menu 83 21 86 83 89 91 82 84 77 64 , 30 , 84 201 185 103 110 , , 32 132 97 99 113 109 113 77 100 113 55 , 201 79 100 203 { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { Command Command Night Vision settings Vision Night Night Vision off Vision Night TPM Bluetooth Night Vision on Vision Night FTM PDC Date Time Language Units Brightness Head-up display Check Control messages Service BMW serviceBMW settings Service requirements Lighting Steering wheel buttons Door locks Activation time Activation Settings Automatic ventilation Automatic Info sources Automatic programs Automatic Parked car operation car Parked Display off Vent settings Vent Settings menu } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } 241 }

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z "..." Identifies Display Identifies Control "..." Index Everythingfrom Z Ato ACC, refer to Active cruise cruise Active to refer ACC, – indicator lamp ABS AntilockBrake A Activated-charcoal filter filter for Activated-charcoal toEmergency refer Accident, Accessories Accepted calls "Add digits""Add for mobile Light Head Adaptive to refer lamps, brake Adaptive assistant brake Adaptive key spare for Adapter – warning lamp Active steering front restraints head Active – warning lamps distance selecting – sensor radar – – indicator lamp cruiseActive control parked- for time" "Activation – engine– oil, refer toApproved – coolant Additives hour signal Activating in thein text. them tofind where indicates individual functions, and toselect used texts control System control climate automatic request phone Brake force display ventilation car engine oils 192 66 112 219 86 227 242 6 219 71 192 93 93 88 70 113 70 69 104 66 93 28 83 87 50 Air recirculation, refer to AUC to refer outlets, Air Ventilation to refer Airing, – manual – automatic Air distribution – sitting safely Air automatic supply, climate on/ recirculation "Air off" AKI, toFuel AKI, refer Air volume Adjusting tone in audio in mode, tone Adjusting Adjusting thigh support interior Adjusting destination to "Add book" address to "Add – storing current position – storing – selecting – entering – deleting Address for navigation "Address for book" navigation – indicator lamp front for lamp – indicator – indicator/warning lamp to refer – deactivating, Airbags unlocking" "After "After door opened" control recirculated-airAutomatic Ventilation passenger airbags control specifications refer to Tone control temperature list" system passenger seat front for Exception 137 94 142 111 108 110 142 , 143 134 110 142 139 109 112 , 47 109 137 209 56 50 95 50 159 141 48 95 142 55 112 – switching off tilt alarm – switching off alarm sensor motion – interior – avoiding unintentional Alarm system All-season tires, refer to to refer tires, All-season doors" "All "All channels" sensor alarm – tilt Alterations, technical, technical, to Alterations, refer "All stations", calling up with Around the steering wheel Around the center console toCenter refer Armrest, vehicleApproved gross oilsApproved engine Approved axleloads, referto to refer system, Anti-theft refer system, alarm Anti-theft Antilock System Brake fluid – washer – coolant Antifreeze mobile phone Antenna for for Caring to refer Antenna, reception "AM", sensor motion andinterior sensor alarms Winter tires For your own safety For your radio armrest refer toWeights weight, Weights Central locking system system to Alarm ABS your vehicle brochure range 86 162 158 36 36 219 117 237 , 30 , 165 162 215 65 35 170 36 35 35 219 6 36 30 184 237 10 14 – refer to Starting destination toStarting– destination refer – refer to Computer Arrival time Assist, refer to refer Assist, Ashtray "Arrow display pop-up navigation for display" "Arrow – recirculated-aircontrol – headlampcontrol cruisecontrol – – air volume – air distribution Automatic Audio device, external – volume – tonecontrol on/off switching – – controls Audio "Audio" recirculated- Automatic AUC off" window "Assist. window Assistance to refer systems, Assistance – storingstations – steeringwheel notification service – – also refer to Comfort Comfort to refer also – – also refer to Caring for your washes car Automatic – ventilation with vehicle off and on switching – – convertible program air automatic – Automatic climate control guidance M Assist BMW instructions" system AUC air control systems Driving stabilitycontrol adjustment access vehicle brochure parked distribution 158 111 118 159 112 38 159 147 158 86 146 111 , 109 161 49 109 159 199 133 65 109 , 164 158 , 166 66 102 20 76 21 201 112 109 117 127 108 Avoiding freeways for freeways Avoiding for highways" "Avoid navigation for ferries" "Avoid Average speed – setting units Average fuel consumption program with AUTO ventilation" "Automatic search station Automatic softclosing Automatic programs" "Automatic – refer to Welcome lamps lighting Pathway to – refer AUX-In connection – in audio mode "A - Z" - "A to refer loads, Axle "Avoid tollroads" for Avoiding unintentional "AUX" the on "Autostore" – refer to Automatic headlamp headlamp Automatic to – refer lightingAutomatic curbAutomatic monitor closing Automatic ofdoors, – refer to Interior lamps – refer to High-beam – refer toDaytime running navigation navigation system system control climate automatic Weights navigation system alarms radio control closing soft Automatic to refer assistant lamps 158 162 192 103 36 109 102 34 145 237 , , 104 178 164 144 84 75 , 178 180 117 144 145 34 109 , 106 113 54 178 163 102 103 75 Backrest contour, refer to B "Balance", refer to Tone Backup lamps, replacing Backrests, refer to Seats Bass, refer to Tone Band-aids, refer to First-aid Battery replacement, remote remote replacement, Battery battery Vehicle to refer – jump starting – Battery tonecontrol "Bass", BMW Maintenance BMW homepage BMW "BMW Contact "BMW Contact" – updating TeleService– assistance roadside – services offered – displaying– vehicle data contacting– BMWCustomer – concierge service activating – AssistBMW Assist" "BMW "Bluetooth" toAir refer Blower, Beverage holder, refer to Cup belts Safety to refer Belts, Being towed to button,refer BC Lumbar support Lumbar control lamps bulbs, refer to Tail control kit access control for comfort System Numbers" Relations volume holders Computer 228 243 224 38 160 159 110 118 221 203 202 204 185 75 194 199 230 201 200 228 194 4 199 48 202 159 200 205 225 48 52

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z – cleaning camera, refer cleaning refer – to camera, – cleaning camera activating – Vision Night BMW Breaking-in the clutch Breaking-in brake pads Breaking-in Breakdown services, refer to Braking safely – warning lamp – breaking-in – brake rotors brake– pads system Brake safely Braking to refer – – handbrake – electronic brake-force CBC – Cornering Brake – breaking-in – brake force display Antilock Brake ABS – Brakes safely Braking to refer – – breaking-in rotors Brake – two-stage replacing– bulbs, refer toTail Brake lamps Brake force display adaptive – assistant Brake for or telephone Bracket holder, toCup refer Bottle websiteBMW Service settings" "BMW making– settings deactivating – Wiper system Roadside Assistance Roadside distribution Control System lamps adapter in mobile phone, refer toSnap- holders 224 86 118 86 87 99 244 124 93 197 60 124 124 124 124 87 124 126 100 4 126 13 87 65 100 , 100 98 88 93 93 124 228 124 126 126 203 "Call" California Proposition 65 C Can holder, refer refer Can holder, to Cup – redialing 8 list Top – from book phone – from – byentering phone Calling – starting – rejecting absence – in – ending – displaying accepted – accepting Call – vehicle cargo – stowing – securing cargo loading Cargo – refer to Caring for your Care Data" "Car Car-care products, refer to for Caring to refer care, Car battery, refer Car to Vehicle Capacities Button for starting engine, Brightness ofControl Vision Night BMW – with Bypassing route sections wheel onsteering Buttons "Brightness" Breaking-in thedifferential, Warning holders number vehicle brochure brochure Caring for your vehicle your vehicle brochure battery refer to Start/Stop button Start/Stop to refer Display differential refer to Engine and 222 192 191 127 225 83 191 118 191 , 193 6 191 237 76 203 190 193 124 84 , 128 193 128 98 192 193 100 150 11 58 CBS Condition Based CBS Condition "CD" Car key, referCar key, Keys/remote to finish, vehicle for Caring the Caring for the carpet, refer to Caring for plastic, refer to Caring for light-alloy wheels, Caring for leather, refer to Caring for artificial leather, Catalytic converter, to refer – with comfort access your for Caring to – refer driving into a – refer to Before Car wash Car radio, refer to Radio refer– separate to operating Mobile phonerefer– to to refer location, – installation Car phone CBC CorneringBrake "Categories" Service control vehicle brochure your for Caring to refer brochure Caring for your vehicle brochure Caring for your vehicle vehicle brochure your for Caring to refer brochure Caring for your vehicle vehicle brochure your for Caring to refer Hot exhaust system vehicle brochure car wash instructions Center armrest Control 158 28 , 59 86 221 172 184 127 , 170 127 117 38 125 184 162 Changing navigation for Changing scale on Changing language wheel Changing a Changes, technical, refer to function hotel – access comfort – system locking Central outside from – – frominside locking Central "Central locking" Center console adjusting armrest, Center – volume – tonecontrol on/off switching – track a selecting – – sampling a track – repeating atrack – randomsequence forward/reverse– fast – controls CD player – volume – tonecontrol on/off switching – track a selecting – CD a selecting – – sampling a track – repeating atrack – randomsequence – installationlocation forward/reverse– fast – controls CD changer Checking air pressure, refer to Cap Check Gas "Check Control Check Control button CHECK Changing wheels on ofmeasure units Changing system display Control Display For your ownsafety height Tire inflation pressure inflation Tire messages" Control Display 117 159 159 158 158 172 172 32 80 159 159 30 79 80 14 33 208 173 148 36 30 84 84 214 158 158 225 173 174 173 174 175 175 175 175 176 176 176 6 30 210 – replacing battery, remote – observe in car wash Comfort access toStartingCold refer start, Cockpit Coupe Clothes hooks, Closing fuel filler cap outside – from inside – from Closing anddate – setting time – hour signal format – 12h/24h Clock "Climate" Cleaning, refer toCaring for lighterCigarette refer socket, – windows, with comfort with comfort – windows, closingComfort Compartment for remote for remote Compartment – refer to CD player – refer to CD changer Compact disc "Communication" – with comfort access – hour signal on Control – displays Computer Compressed audio files to refer Compartments, Child-restraint fixing system system fixing Child-restraint Child seats, refer to Child restraintsystems Cigarette lighter Chrome parts, refer to Caring control engine your vehicle brochure devices to Connecting electrical access with Coupe lock Ignition to refer control, Display compartments Storage LATCH safely Transporting children for your vehicle brochure 74 58 56 10 59 38 76 56 119 109 75 83 83 32 30 36 119 83 190 172 208 37 172 38 37 , 118 82 200 56 172 117 – convertible– program for Convertible – windows Control Center, refer to Control Display, refer to – glass sunroof glass – convertible top – Convenient operation toCockpit refer Controls, iDrive to refer Controller, off/on switching – setting– brightness – opening andclosing– – window– andconvertible top – wind deflector – top – rollover protection "Concert hall", refer to Tone Condensation, toWhen refer Condensation, Concierge service "Concierge" Condition Based Service Confirmation signalsConfirmation for "Confirmation" Connecting car vacuum Connecting car Consumption Consumption display, refer to Consumption statistics, refer statistics,Consumption "Contrast" with BMW Night with BMW "Contrast" guidance"Continue to control climate automatic iDrive iDrive windows access with comfort operation system control vehicle is parked CBS locking and unlockinglocking and electrical devices cleaner, refer to Connecting consumption Average fuel consumption Averageto fuel Vision destination?" 42 221 16 16 245 100 37 109 161 96 31 39 202 , 32 75 75 31 31 147 45 31 21 , 202 126 32 119 , 83 32 31 16 10

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z Cornering Brake Control Copyright to refer system, Cooling function, automatic Cooling Cooling, maximum – temperature – checking level Coolant opening andclosing– – emergency closing convenient– operation – closing manually – care, refer Caring to for your top Convertible "Curve mode" with – storing – entering – displaying position Current "Current position" refer to weight, Curb Courtesy lamps, refer to to refer lamps, Courtesy Country of destination for Cradle for telephone or mobile or Cradle telephone for "Customer Cup holders Cruising range – active cruise control Cruise control Cylinders, refer to Engine Engine to refer Cylinders, CBC Coolant climate control vehicle brochure M Night Vision BMW Weights Interior lamps navigation phone Relations" data 234 86 219 117 142 219 2 142 237 246 153 135 15 194 74 65 75 , 106 220 118 , 111 202 153 43 111 100 43 66 43 32 "Daytime running running "Daytime format" "Date – setting format – date Date "Date" – weights – measurements – engine – dimensions – capacities technicalData, Dashboard, refer to D Defrosting windshield, refer to windshield, Defrosting Defrosting windows and Defrosting windows – refer to Tire Pressure – refer to Flat Tire Monitor tires Defect, Decommissioning the vehicle, "Deactivated" lamp – warning DBC Dynamic Brake Control – replacing bulbs lamps running Daytime Defrost position, refer to refer position, Defrost "Delete"mobile for "Delete data" for navigation "Delete all numbers" for "Delete address book" for – entering – deleting address Destination lamps" Cockpit Defrosting windows removing condensation Monitor vehicle brochure refer to Caring for your Defrosting windows phone system mobile phone system navigation 74 83 193 234 83 103 143 237 10 90 143 134 237 , 83 235 83 106 , 50 234 88 137 193 235 224 110 143 110 110 103 110 89 – changing specified specified – changing – volume ofvoice – voice instructions – terminating/continuing – starting – interrupting arrival and – distance route – displaying Direction instructions, refer to Directional indicators, referto – Coupe – Convertible Dimensions Digital radio, refer to High Digital clock "Diamond button" number" "Dial phone mobile for "Dial" audio in "Details" Destinations recently driven for list Destination Directory, refer to Phone Phone to refer Directory, Directory for navigation, refer for navigation, Directory – selecting from address address from – selecting – homeaddress – entry – entering viavoice – destination list Destination for navigation – selecting using – canceling voice – bypassing route guidance Destination – storing route instructions Voice instructions Turn signals Definition Radio mode to navigation book to Address book book information instructions sections 141 134 192 142 144 174 235 142 146 150 , 141 74 180 236 140 146 150 55 191 63 144 141 147 166 55 142 137 149 149 146 146 191 146 Display, refer to iDrive "Display" Engine to refer Displacement, Direct selectionbuttons Display elements, refer to Distance control, refer to to refer Distance, battery vehicle – – coolant control ofremote – battery Disposal windshield, the on Displays to lighting, refer Display Displaying vehicle data Distance to destination,refer todest." "Distance settings" "Display Instrument to refer – – on Control Display, refer to Displays off" "Display Door entry lighting, entry refer Door to to refer warning, Distance – remotecontrol – manualoperation Doors "Driver's door only" door "Driver's ventilation Draft-free Grades Quality DOT "Door locks" lockDoor Door key, refer to Keys/ controls data Instrument cluster Active cruise control Computer with comfort access refer to Head-Up Display Instrument lighting to Computer cluster iDrive Interior lamps Control PDC Park Distance remote control 234 16 12 219 85 84 32 16 76 21 30 76 , 106 225 30 78 28 84 76 32 , 30 12 31 212 , 112 106 97 38 66 205 21 96 "Dynamic route" for Dynamic Driving Control Dynamic Drive DVD for navigation Dynamic Stability Control lamp – indicator – activating DTC Dynamic Traction – malfunction Dynamic Traction Control – indicator lamp – indicator Electric convertible top hotel compartment, – storage – luggage compartment lid – glass sunroof door filler – fuel – driver's door lock– door – convertible top malfunction Electrical toButtons Eject button, refer Easy entry/exit toEntering refer entry, Easy E DSC Dynamic Stability Stability Dynamic DSC Cooling to refer air, the Drying General to refer tips, Driving Driving through water control stability Driving Driving route, refer to Parking to refer lamps, Driving navigation DSC Control DTC function on CD player rear Control function driving notes systems Displaying route beams lamps/low 51 87 87 87 87 33 111 86 32 88 145 88 32 89 54 158 124 41 208 13 13 43 147 , , 132 102 88 87 126 42 62 34 – transmission lock, sport sport lock, transmission – luggage– compartmentlid hotel function – sunroof glass – filler fuel door – driver's– door door – lock convertible top – Emergencyoperation, refer to refer assistance, Emergency check level oil Electronic Electronic brake-force Electric steering wheel Emergency release for – switching– offwhen equipped – switching off starting,– comfort access – starting – speed – overheated,refer to Coolant – data – breaking-in Engine "End call" "Enable services" Emergency services, refer to Emergency request Engine coolant Engine compartment automatic transmission automatic operation Manual Assistance Roadside to distribution adjustment luggage compartment luggage compartment lid in access with comfort transmission, Automatic with temperature Assistance Roadside 234 247 234 38 59 192 32 124 54 87 32 74 59 219 41 208 33 43 205 227 217 228 35 218 62 228 36 34

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z Equalizer, refer to Tone Tone to refer Equalizer, Entry map for destination output sound Entertainment "Entertainment" Entering zip code for of town/city Entering for town/city Entering Entering rear intersection, Entering Entering address "Enter address" starting,Engine refer to to Engine speed,Engine refer overheating,Engine refer to output, toEngineEngine refer level" oil "Engine temperature– gauge – temperature recommended– oils grades, oilto Approved refer– – oil change interval– changes, between – electronic oil level check approved– oils refer additives, to – Approved adding– Engine oil Event data data recorders Event ESP ElectronicStability "ESN" "Equalizer", tonecontrol control on/off navigation destination name navigation navigation engineStarting data temperature Coolant data engine oils requirements Service to refer engine oils Control Stability Dynamic Program,refer DSC to 234 234 169 159 219 161 87 248 219 135 135 136 219 219 51 75 219 77 134 158 218 134 59 135 , 219 75 222 , 142 137 74 161 139 218 "Fader", refer to Tone F to refer lashing, for Eyes and forEye tow-starting Fader, refer to Tone "Favorites", calling up with with up calling "Favorites", for route" "Fast player – CD changer – CD forward Fast Fastest route for Fastening safety belts, referto – refer to Switching off – refer to Avoiding alarm False Failure messages, referto First aid, refer to First-aid First-aid to refer aid, First Fine wood, refer to Caring for Filter, refer to Microfilter/ fluid Filler washer neck for External audio device audio External – tilting down passenger-side – folding in and out heating – automatic dimming – automatic – adjusting mirrors Exterior toHot refer system, Exhaust control Securing cargo fitting toTow towing, refer control radio navigation navigation Safety belts alarm unintentional alarms Check Control kit your vehicle brochure filteractivated-charcoal mirror feature exhaust system 228 166 35 229 54 160 160 54 53 176 144 144 176 52 53 79 128 125 53 53 117 36 112 65 Footbrake, refer to Braking Braking to refer Footbrake, FTM, refer to Flat Tire Flat refer to FTM, "FTM" airbags, passenger Front Front airbags Freeway, refer to Route own safety For your refer grades, oil specified For to refer lighting, Footwell Folding into raised position position raised into Folding – indicator lamp – indicator Fog lamps FM, waveband reception "FM", Filler to refer reservoir, Fluid to refer Floor mats/carpets, for Caring to refer mats, Floor lamp – warning chains – snow ofsystem – limits system – initializing alarms – false Flat Tire Monitor Flashing when locking and First-aid kit Flashlight,to refer – warning lamp – warning Monitor Pressure – Tire tires – run-flat Monitor Tire – Flat Flat tire Convertible safely Monitor deactivating criteria to Approved engine oils lamps Interior compartment floor, floor, compartment convertible top range fluid washer neck for brochure Caring for your vehicle your vehicle brochure confirmation signals unlocking, toSettingrefer Rechargeable flashlight 89 158 126 144 89 106 228 , 162 94 35 89 90 215 94 162 90 90 106 13 , 89 89 92 , 89 , 92 89 106 6 , 214 31 65 90 117 219 Full screen display, refer to Full mobile phonepreparation Fuel gauge of event the in releasing – Fuel filler door Fuel-efficient driving Fuel display, refer to Fuel to refer contents, tank – – specifications – quality high-quality– brands – fuel specifications – display – averageconsumption Fuel Garage-door opener, refer opener, to Garage-door G – refer to Average fuel Gasoline Fuses Night with BMW "Full screen" – refer to Fuel – convenient operation with convenient– operation convenient– Glass sunroof, electricwith General driving manual lever, Gearshift Gasoline display, referFuelto fuel toRequired – refer – remotecontrol manually moving – window off Switching assistance package electrical malfunction gauge Capacities control Integrated universal remote consumption Vision specifications comfort access raise function notes transmission gauge 226 124 100 75 75 209 75 115 184 75 , 237 125 20 208 60 75 40 209 209 31 37 41 209 124 209 209 32 208 75 Hands-free system, to refer system, Hands-free HD radio, refer to High radio" "HD flashers warning Hazard lamp – indicator Handbrake H Head Light, refer to Adaptive toAdaptive Head Light, refer – replacing bulbs washer neck for – filler – cleaning tank,refer to Wiper to refer – cleaning, your for Caring to refer care, – Headlamps Headlamp flasher Headlamp control, Head airbags Heater – steering wheel – seats window – rear – mirrors Heated Head-Up Display Display" "Head-Up – sitting safely – front head – active front Head restraints Gross vehicle weight, refer to Grills,refer Ventilation to to refer navigation, GPS flashlight – rechargeable Glove compartment Microphone Definition Radio Head Light fluid Capacities system vehicle brochure automatic restraints Weights system Navigation 217 50 109 53 53 64 237 166 60 50 102 237 104 94 110 14 47 13 54 223 96 63 166 , 97 60 116 132 15 117 112 – also refer to Minimum tread tread Minimum to refer also – Hydroplaning assistant, brake Hydraulic "House number" for "Hour memo" system exhaust Hot – unlocking manually function Hotel Horn Hood ofBMW Homepage "Home address" for Holder for cups Hills Heavy cargo, refer to Securing Heating with engine switched – steering wheel – seats utilization heat residual – – rear window – interior exterior mirrors – Heating Height, refer to refer Height, High water,refer Driving to High Definition Radio – indicator lamp – headlamp flasher High beams High-beam assistant – steering wheel – seats Height adjustment depth assistant toBrake refer destination entry systemnavigation cargo heat refer toResidual off, Dimensions through water 126 10 216 112 53 48 128 213 249 108 104 125 235 110 83 33 118 13 126 54 54 53 137 104 4 125 144 104 33 166 112 87

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z – selecting or confirming confirming or selecting – item menu selecting – operating– principle – displays, menus – controls – controller changing units ofmeasure – changing– settings changing– menu page changing– language changing– date and time – assistance window adjusting– brightness iDrive – tire coding – run-flat tires tire recommended – Identification mark ID3-Tag, refer toInformation Ice, toOutside refer Definition toHigh refer IBOC, I Ignition key position 1, refer to to refer 1, position Ignition key Ignition key, refer to Keys/ – switched on – switched off Ignition – symbols information status – – start menu – starting with engine comfort – Ignition lock to refer 2, position Ignition key Imprint i menu entry displayand form brands track about temperature warning Radio Radio readiness remote control access Ignition on 16 17 19 2 58 166 215 38 16 18 16 250 58 212 58 17 174 58 214 59 28 17 58 84 82 20 17 20 84 19 83 19 74 82 – drive for navigation DVD navigation for drive – changer – CD location Installation map" "Input date time and – – seat, mirror and steering – refer to Power failure – radio, refer to Storing – FlatTire Monitor Initializing sources" "Info on "Information refer to menu, Information navigation for "Information" of – ontown/city position – oncurrent location – onanother Information Info menu – refer to Tire Pressure – refer to Flat Tire Monitor Inflation pressure monitoring Inflation pressure, refer to Tire Indicator and warning lamps, – TPMTire Pressure – safety belt warning – handbrake – fog lamps – fog – FlatTire Monitor – DTC – DSC system – brake – airbags steering – active – ABS Antilock Brake Indicator/warning lamps wheel memory stations destination" imenu system destination Monitor inflation pressure overview Monitor System 13 13 17 95 , , 140 88 90 92 164 17 88 87 13 13 139 13 140 176 141 , 77 , 88 106 82 60 93 49 89 90 210 140 52 140 226 132 89 Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort Comfort to refer Keyless-Go, K starting Jump toiDrive refer Joystick, Jacking points J Intermittent wiper mode Key Memory, refer to Personal Personal to refer Memory, Key Keyless opening and closing, Kick-down, Sport automatic automatic Sport Kick-down, key – spare settings, – key-related refer to Keys "Keypad" Instrument panel, refer to Instrument lighting refer illumination, Instrument cluster Instrument navigation for Instructions Instrument panel, refer to Integrated universalremote key Integrated Interesting destination for for destination Interesting – switching on with remote lamps Interior time" "Interim Interior rearview mirror, mirror, rearview Interior – switching off sensor motion Interior access Profile access Comfort to refer transmission Personal Profile Cockpit to Instrument lighting instructions toVoice refer system, Instrument cluster Instrument control navigation control feature automatic dimming 28 29 36 115 31 54 10 194 28 140 149 106 228 82 28 36 225 61 29 12 106 12 36 16 106 64 36 Lamps and bulbs Lane Lane limit lines, refer to – refer to Parking lamps/low – refer to High-beam Lamps L Knock control Knee airbags – fornavigation /Units" "Language – fornavigation "Languages" Last destinations, refer to to refer destinations, Last Lashing eyes,refer to – lampsbulbs and – instruments Lighting "Lighting" Lighter Light-emitting diodes Licensereplacing platelamps, to refer Length, Load securing equipment, Loading, refer to Cargo "Limit" Light switch – of the vehicle, refer to light-emitting LEDs warning lane Leaving LATCH child restraint fixing pos." seat "Last Leaving lane warning lane Leaving beams assistant system system Destination list cargo Securing LEDs bulbs Dimensions refer to Securing cargo loading Lamps diodes system 81 119 223 225 102 223 102 133 133 56 127 64 104 102 , 94 , , 84 106 235 209 103 149 149 50 141 128 223 223 84 101 101 128 Lowerback support, referto – replacing bulbs – increasing capacity, – hotel function – emergency release – capacity Luggage compartment – opening with remote remote with – opening outside from – opening inside from – opening to refer – opening/closing, LW, waveband LW, Lumbar support manually – unlocking remote with – opening outside from – opening inside from – opening – emergency release – emergency operation – comfort access Luggage compartmentlid – without key, refer – without toComfort key, outside – from inside – from signals – confirmation Locking the Lock buttons doors, in driving" after "Lock – automatic beams Low outside – from inside – from signals – confirmation Locking and unlocking doors Lumbar support Convertible control lid Luggage compartment control access Locking to refer 34 31 36 31 31 237 , 102 102 34 33 32 35 31 30 162 33 48 224 37 33 48 33 35 35 34 34 34 31 31 34 34 34 34 M+S tires,M+S refer to Winter M – refer to Service and and Service to refer – Maintenance – transmission lock, sport sport lock, transmission – luggage– compartmentlid hotel function – sunroof glass – filler fuel door – driver's– door door – lock convertible top – operation Manual "Manual" on the radio air distribution Manual Malfunction warnings, refer to luggage– compartmentlid hotel function – sunroof glass – filler fuel door – driver's– door door – lock convertible top – Malfunction Maintenance system and Warranty to refer – Service to refer – Master key, referMaster key, Keys/ to view facingMap north Map view – destination entry – changing scale for navigation Map facing "Map north" direction oftravel" "Map transmission Manual Maximum cooling tires Booklet for US models US for Booklet Warranty Information automatic transmission automatic Check Control Canadian models Service Guide Booklet for requirements remote control 215 251 148 32 32 221 32 32 41 41 208 208 77 33 33 79 28 43 43 148 111 139 148 221 60 221 163 148 110 148 221 62 34 34

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z MENU, button refer to Start toStart buttonrefer MENU, mirror Seat, to refer Memory, – Coupe – Convertible Measurements, referto speed withMaximum winter Menus, refer to iDrive Mobile phone battery Mobile phone touch dialing,– tone to refer – Top 8 operating separate to refer – – redialing – operation via iDrive – operation by voice – missed calls refer to installation location, – – ending call calling – – adjusting volume – accepted calls Mobile phone Missed calls calls" "Missed – memory, refer to Seat, mirror – heating – folding in and out monitor curb automatic – Mirrors Mirror dimming feature – for voice command – for mobile phone Microphone Microfilter traffic list for Message menu memory steeringand wheel Dimensions tires Tone dialing method instructions Center armrest memory steeringand wheel system information 215 53 17 193 191 235 53 14 49 49 112 193 252 193 191 236 151 193 192 193 117 14 190 53 195 190 198 16 194 54 54 Navigation instructions, refer refer instructions, Navigation DVD Navigation Navigation drive, installation map via – selecting – entering manually destination Navigation "Navigation" N MW, waveband View" "M on/off" "Mute scan – sampling, – randomplay sequence Music tracks – refer to Wiper system Monitoring pressure oftires, Monitor, refer to iDrive to refer Service, Mobile Multifunction steering wheel, wheel, steering Multifunction interface – USB/audio files audio – compressed MP3 recentMost mobile phone on/ off" "Monitor – refer to Turn signals/ switch Multifunction instructions on/off to Switching voice location refer to Flat Tire Monitor Roadside Assistance wheel onsteering toButtons refer numbers headlamp flasher headlamp 11 97 132 193 76 55 , 162 132 134 174 55 139 63 134 149 179 16 228 64 175 172 89 – destination guidance in entry – destination – bypassing route – address book Navigation system – displaying current current – displaying – destination list – entering destination via – entering adestination route – displaying – looking for interesting interesting for – looking destinations – last – selecting destination via – selecting destination using list – route DVD – navigation – starting destination destination – starting – selecting route criteria Neck support, refer to Front toFront Neck refer support, "Navigation voice – volume adjustment – voice instructions – terminating/continuing off,refer to – switching "Next entertainment New wheels tires and route" "New controls remote New destination" "New "New address" for navigation Night Vision, refer refer Nightto Vision, assistance window sections position voice manually destination map information guidance head restraints instructions" guidance destination guidance destination Terminating/continuing source" system M Night Vision BMW 139 137 142 55 153 150 149 134 146 150 140 140 55 142 141 50 132 , 147 141 134 149 134 132 149 98 132 150 28 214 , 146 146 139 144 O washer toWindshield refer – – refer to Ventilation Nozzles on/ Vision off" "Night off" Vision "Night OBD socket, refer to Socket toSocket refer socket, OBD Nylon rope, toTow- refer Nylon Octane ratings, refer to Fuel Fuel to refer ratings, Octane Operating principle, iDrive – using the control remote lock door using – outside from – – frominside access comfort – Opening and closing "On location" "On destination" Onboard toolkit Onboard monitor,refer to "Onboard info" anew "On destination" for Service to refer – and Service to refer – interval change Oil Oil, refer to Engine oil Odometer nozzles Diagnostics interface Diagnostics Onboard OBD for starting and towing and starting specifications iDrive system navigation requirements models for Canadian Booklet and Guide Warranty Service or formodels US Booklet Information Warranty 16 65 74 32 140 30 76 77 209 223 140 32 36 100 140 112 229 55 218 222 17 30 – activating activation – activating activation Parked car ventilation car ventilation" "Parked car operation" "Parked Park Distance Control PDC Panic mode P Parking brake, refer to Parking assistant, refer to Parking aid, refer to PDCPark Parking, vehicle – switching on and off time – setting activation – LED Output, refer to Engine Engine to refer Output, Orientation menu, refer to "Options" book phone – voice – redialing – placing acall – dialing phone number – correcting phone – commands – canceling volume – adjusting Operation by voice formobile Outside air, refer to AUC Outside temperature temperature Outside – screen display – screen – radio control – operating principle Overview – changing unit ofmeasure times Handbrake Control DistancePDC Park Distance Control directly data Start menu number phone control recirculated-airAutomatic display 108 234 114 195 111 74 113 85 196 203 197 195 31 195 60 17 158 196 59 20 85 196 196 17 113 196 113 113 85 84 Power windows, refer to Power failure current Storing to refer – current Displaying to refer – Position "Presets" on the onthe "Presets" – deleting from phone Phone numbers dialing– phonenumber deleting– entry deleting– all entries – creating and editing voice – changing entry book Phone "Phone" "Perspective" Personal Profile PDC Park Distance Control "PDC displayon" "PDC" Pathway lighting lighting" "Pathway Passenger-side exterior Parts and accessories replacing– bulbs Parking lamps Plugging unit forremote "Play" on the radio Plasters, refer to First-aid – power windows sunroof glass – system protection Pinch – Top 8 selecting– in phone book most– recent numbers – dialing Pollen, refer toMicrofilter/ refer Pollen, Windows position position radio book phone book mirror, tilting down lock Ignition to refer control, kit activated-charcoal filter activated-charcoal 228 58 86 162 193 193 253 191 186 142 153 , 38 170 190 , 226 188 196 148 102 41 193 29 192 103 224 40 86 , 191 103 170 193 54 6 193 192 112 193 85

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z – windows sunroof glass – to function, refer Protective Programmable memory Programmable buttons on "Profile" monitoringPressure tires, of Pressure, tires Presetting parked car Radio position, refer to Radio toRadio position, refer Radio Radio key, refer to Keys/ to refer Band, Weather – – volume tone – control – switching on/off stations storing – best with station – – station selection station – search station – selecting – frequency selecting – – satellite radio stations sampling – – High Definition Radio – controls – Autostore Radio Radiator fluid, refer to R Pinch protection system buttons steering wheel Monitor Pressure Tire TPM to refer times ventilation activation readiness remote control Weather news flashes reception waveband manually Coolant 113 205 159 21 90 219 158 40 163 164 254 58 164 158 159 210 169 41 163 , 55 28 162 164 158 162 163 166 166 Recirculation of air, refer to Redialing with mobile phone mobile for "Redial" Recording times, refer to refer to seat, Reclining "Random", random play random "Random", wiper windshield sensor, Rain storing stations, Radio – with comfort access on – switched off – switched Radio readiness Recirculated-air mode, mode, refer Recirculated-air flashlight Rechargeable Reception quality ofmobile station – regional stations – radio – quality Reception calls" "Received closing and opening – – heating Rear window Rearview mirrors, refer to Rear lamps, refer to Tail lamps Reading "RDS" player – CD changer – CD playRandom sequence "Random directory" in audio in audio all" "Random recirculated-air control recirculated-air Automatic to AUC recirculated-air control recirculated-air Automatic AUC phone Stopwatch Seats sequence system information Status to refer phone, Mirrors lamps mode mode 165 175 176 48 224 197 165 53 110 64 175 175 82 20 175 58 59 107 165 58 192 164 37 39 164 117 111 111 192 "Relock door if door not "Relock Unlocking to refer – locks, – hood Releasing Refueling toTail refer Reflectors, Replacement remote control, control, remote Replacement fuses Replacement audio in track" "Repeat "Repeat" in audio mode "Repeat directory" in audio Removing condensation from – malfunction – luggage compartmentlid – garage-door opener – comfort access – battery replacement control Remote to distance Remaining refer to distance, Remaining Replacing bulbs, refer to Replacing tires, changing a Reset, refer to Resetting tone toResetting refer Reset, settings – tone – stopwatch "Reset" Reserve warning, refer to Fuel Required fuel Reporting safety defects – refer to Safety belts Safety to refer – – for children systems Restraint heat Residual opened" lamps controls referremote New to mode mode windows Computer to refer destination, Cruising range Lamps and bulbs and Lamps wheel settings gauge 216 175 175 225 224 90 75 208 161 28 33 , 110 91 76 82 56 209 31 112 161 28 , 75 36 38 223 226 52 115 38 175 7 37 31 "Roadside Road map automatic Sport – – manualtransmission Reverse gear player– CD changer– CD Reverse, fast Retreaded tires Rollover protection system on system protection Rollover replacing– to refer bulbs, Roadside parking lamps Roadside assistance Roadside Roadside Assistance – – displaying arrow display – display changing– criteria – changing bypassing sections– Route to refer Rotary/pushbutton, – displaying streets ortowns/ streets displaying – – displaying map view toTow-starting Rope, refer – lowering Route information, referto selecting – "Route preference", Route map, refer Displaying to Run-flat System Component Rubber parts, refer to Caring RSC Run-flat System selection Route Assistance" transmission Convertible Parking lamps iDrive cities towing and voice instructions Destination guidance with changing map view map tires Run-flat to refer RSC, for your vehicle brochure tires flat Component, refer to Run- 144 214 149 16 147 214 148 96 144 150 144 148 176 229 96 176 194 61 214 144 224 , 144 200 149 200 150 228 148 60 104 147 – rollover protection system, system, – rollover protection control stability – driving – airbags Brake Antilock – ABS Safety systems to refer tensioners, belt Safety – sitting safely – reminder – refer to Caring for your lamp – indicator – damage Safety belts S "Scan directory" in audio mode audio in all" "Scan – radio player – CD changer – CD Scan radio with – stations CD on tracks music – "Scan" current "Save radio with "SAT" – storing channel – selecting channel – enabling channels radio Satellite refer toRun-flat Safety tires, belts – safety – winter tires – winter replacement – tire Monitor Pressure – Tire pressure inflation – tire – FlatTire Monitor tire – flat a with driving – continuing tires Run-flat Convertible systems System Safety belts vehicle brochure mode destination" tires damaged tire 214 163 174 90 94 86 53 86 52 , 174 52 92 215 214 52 96 174 169 52 144 47 90 52 158 170 , 214 89 92 170 169 163 , 174 169 , 210 215 90 174 Service,refer Roadside to Selecting audio sources, refer Selecting frequency Selecting distance with active Service and Warranty "Service" Selector lever, manual Selection options with Selecting route Selecting menu items – refer to CBS Condition Condition CBS to refer – Service Interval Display "Service "Service Request" notification" "Service Service to refer – Screw thread for tow SDARS, refer to Satellite – memory, refer to Seat, mirror mirror toSeat, refer memory, – lumbar– support – heating – adjusting Seats – ski bag Securing cargo thigh– support setting storing the – seat sports – safely sitting – "Select current speed" "Select as Assistance to Operating via iDrive via Operating to manually cruise control Smodels US Information Booklet for transmission systemnavigation Based Service requirements" requirements fitting radio memory steeringand wheel destination" 48 169 230 255 120 53 77 49 163 48 , 48 221 228 201 140 47 60 48 77 128 144 69 221 78 48 , , 218 194 , 203 49 201 144 201 19 , 81 201 , 158 218

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z – refer to CBS Condition Condition CBS to refer – Service requirements Settings menu, to menu, refer Settings – units of measure – language – date to refer configuring, – – clock, 12h/24h mode changing– onControl – BMW Night Vision Settings unlocking for – Assist forBMW – "Settings" to refer button, Setting "Set time" "Set servicedate" "Set date" – in trip computer in– audio mode "Set" "Service Status" Short commands of voice Shifting, automatic Sport to refer time, Setting Short route in navigation, refer refer navigation, in route Short "Short route"for Signaling aturn,Signaling triple turn Horn to refer horn, Signal signals,Side turn replacing Side airbags destination "Show current position" "Show Sill panel lighting, refer to to refer lighting, panel Sill Based Service imenu Personal Profile Display Controls, controller command system command transmission time Preselecting activation to Selectingto route navigation signal activationsignal bulbs position" Interior lamps 83 113 224 17 82 83 205 83 84 139 256 144 94 30 61 106 158 221 205 203 77 29 64 78 84 144 238 100 16 77 83 139 10 Socket for Onboard Connecting to refer Socket, Snow chains "Speed volume","Speed refer Tone to Speedometer Speed limit warning, refer to Speed-dependent Approved to refer oils, Special – key – fuses – adapter for spare key Spare referSOS, toInitiating an CD, with to refer Song search refer to aid, Soft closure Socket for remote control, – releasing transmission transmission – releasing – kick-down – Dynamic Driving Control automatic Sport Speed with wintertires – with comfort access – towing – using – mounting/removing adapter Snap-in to refer assistant, Slope toGlass refer Sliding/tilt roof, Ski bag belts safety – with restraints head – with airbags – with Sitting safely Diagnostics interface Diagnostics electrical devices control Speed limit volume engine oils emergency request tracks,Sampling scan soft closing Automatic refer to Ignition lock lock transmission Starting assistant Starting function sunroof, electric with raise 28 62 226 184 119 230 160 160 40 61 , 219 215 47 81 231 47 12 60 47 119 88 197 47 227 58 38 28 215 222 174 34 62 – automatic adjustment, refer refer adjustment, – automatic – adjustment Steering wheel Status ofthis Owner's Manual Status information onControl "Status" Station, refer toRadio inspection" "State – automatic adjustment, refer refer adjustment, – automatic – buttons onsteering Steering with variable ratio, "Steering wheel buttons" – buttons programmable – memory toIgnition lock – lock, refer – heating Steptronic, toSport Steptronic, refer "State / Province" for for /Province" "State "Start Service" for "Start service" guidance" route "Start iDrive Start menu, to refer onslopes, Starting off Starting engine referStarting difficulties, to Starting assistant inSport Sport the program "Start guidance" "Start stopwatch for "Start" – switching off the engine – starting engine the button Start/Stop button" "Star Stability control, refer to to Easy entry/exit to Easy at time ofprinting Display memory to Steering wheel wheel refer to Active steering Active to refer automatic transmission automatic destination entry destination Assist BMW Starting assistant starting Jump transmission automatic systems control stability Driving 11 78 54 20 49 49 86 54 55 202 201 59 228 137 58 88 17 78 135 54 88 5 59 , 82 146 162 139 55 93 60 61 55 59 58 Summer tires, refer to Wheels destination for "Street" Storing tires refer Storing sitting position, Storing current position "Store" on theradio "Store in address book" for compartments Storage Stopwatch "Stopwatch" stopwatch for "Stop" – replacing– bulbs Tail lamps Tachometer T Target cursor for capacity tank fuel – Capacities to refer also – Tank capacity – traffic information with with information traffic – – statusinformation system navigation – – indicator and warning Symbols Swiveling headlamps, refer to – radio player– CD changer– CD – audio Switching on Switching automatically Switches, refer toCockpit SW, waveband "Surround Settings", referto and tires and entry wheel memory mirror steering to Seat, and system navigation navigation navigation system navigation lamps Adaptive Head Light assistant beam low beams, refer to High- between high and beams Tone control 158 136 158 13 4 224 210 82 158 139 215 74 82 158 160 162 49 224 104 208 20 152 164 142 150 82 104 117 142 , 237 171 10 – changing units of units – changing with automatic – adjusting – adjusting in upper body Temperature TeleService list" "Telephone – refer to separate operating – refer to Mobile phone to refer location, – installation Telephone refer to Telematics, Technical data Technical to alterations, refer – changing units of units – changing Temperature display – refer to Coolant Tempomat, refer to Cruise toCruise refer Tempomat, Temperatureengine gauge, temperature – outside temperature – outside "Theater", refer to Tone Tone to refer "Theater", language" "Text "Terminate services" Timer, refer to Preselecting format" "Time Date" / "Time "Time" Tilting downpassenger-side – switching off Tilt alarm sensor refer to points, Tie-down The individualvehicle measure climate control region instructions Center armrest Assist BMW For your ownsafety measure temperature control oil warning control activation time exterior mirror Securing cargo 75 83 110 65 161 74 84 84 201 82 199 74 83 36 234 54 55 84 113 109 36 117 128 204 5 6 74 184 – pressure monitoring, refer to – new wheels and tires monitoring – inflation minimum– tread depth pressure inflation – – damage – condition – breaking-in – air loss – age Tires Tire replacement, new wheels Grading Quality Tire – size, refer to The right right refer size, The to – – size – run-flat tires retreaded– tires – replacing – with run-flat properties, refer properties, run-flat with – – winter tires – wheel/tire combination – wear indicators TMC station, refer to Traffic refer station, toTraffic TMC "Top 8" for 8" "Top mobile phone Top tool refer toOnboard Tools, locking/unlocking on Tone middle– setting – adjusting Tone in audio mode Tone dialing method "Tone" Tire Pressure Monitor Tire pressure loss Tire inflation pressure "Timer 2" for parked-car "Timer 1" for parked-car Tire Pressure Monitor Monitor Tire Flat to refer pressure, and tires TPM wheels and tires to Run-flat tires Run-flat to information kit ventilation ventilation 42 223 212 211 90 159 257 90 89 213 214 214 159 213 , 113 113 92 215 124 150 214 161 214 213 214 90 214 210 212 , 194 91 210 214 213 90 214 192 31

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance Everything from A to Z – refer to Bypassing route route Bypassing to refer – displaying traffic – Traffic congestion DSC to refer control, Traction refer feature, Traction-assist Track width, refer to CD with selecting – – sampling on CD – random sequence – finding Tracks – warning lamp limits system – system resetting – Pressure Tire TPM "TPM" Tow-starting / "Town City" fordestination with Sport – automatic – with manual tow fittings – – methods Towing fitting Tow bar Tow Touch tonedialing, refer to Engine to refer Torque, – during destination – displaying – depiction in route map for information Traffic rope Tow – symbols sections information Control Stability Dynamic Control to DSC Dynamic Stability Dimensions Monitor entry transmission transmission Tone dialing method data guidance navigation 234 91 135 229 230 174 87 87 231 90 152 150 230 229 153 258 151 150 229 229 150 235 230 230 91 92 174 91 173 175 194 152 Treble, refer Treble, toTone Turn signals Turning circle, refer to Trunk lid, refer toLuggage Trunk, refer toLuggage Trip odometer Trip meter, also refer to Trip signal" turn "Triple – refer to Trip meter – refer to Trip computer Trip-distance counter Trip computer computer" "Trip control "Treble", tone Uniform Tire Grading/ Tire Uniform Quality Undercarriage protection, U – average fuel fuel – average Units "Units" – temperature – transmission lock, manually manually lock, – transmission – towing – starting assistant automatic – sport transmission – manual Transmission Info settings" "Traffic Transporting children Tread depth, refer to Minimum device, securing Transport control Dimensions lid compartment compartment computer UTQR vehicle brochure refer to Caring for your consumption automatic transmission automatic sport unlocking, and locking transmission safely tread depth refer to Securing cargo 84 56 212 230 159 76 63 213 235 84 76 74 60 84 35 77 34 88 64 74 151 159 60 76 128 62 – parked car ventilation – for cooling – draft-free Ventilation refer to position, Vehicle – jacking points Vehicle jack for / Tires" "Vehicle – weights for Caring to refer – washing, – parking – measurements, refer to loading – cargo your for Caring to refer care, – – breaking-in – battery Vehicle V Universal garage-door garage-door Universal Universal remote control, refer refer control, remote Universal – without key, refer to Comfort toComfort – without key, refer outside – from inside – from Unlocking "Unlock button" "Use location as current "Use "USB" in audio mode interface USB/audio services" "Update Using turn signals –Replacing refer battery to Disposal to refer – Used batteries position Displaying current unlocking your vehicle brochure Dimensions vehicle brochure control universal remote Integrated to refer opener, remote control remote to Integrated universal access address" 225 36 115 59 237 153 112 142 112 30 225 112 33 124 235 30 , 127 225 144 30 115 63 225 203 179 180 112 38 – setting speed- setting – mobilephone – compartment luggage – to refer tank, fuel – – audiosources Volume Voice phone book – volume on/off switching – – windshield– cleaning system, instructions voice – – repeating – muting for instructions Voice shortcommands – – overview – system command Voice Voice, refer to Destination Destination to refer Voice, Viscosity settings" "Vent ofautomatic outlets Vent – wiper system wiper – ofthe reservoir – capacity Washer fluid and Guide Warranty Service triangle Warning leavingWarning on lane, refer to refer messages, Warning Warning lamps, referto W – right/left front-to-rear – Volume adjustment in audio dependent Capacities refer to Capacities system navigation instructions guidance with voice climate control models for Canadian Booklet warning lane Leaving to Check Control lamps Indicator and warning mode 158 13 55 150 219 221 160 23 55 237 160 149 , 160 150 65 190 111 158 79 228 108 55 196 238 150 149 , 237 149 237 101 65 Water roads, on refer to Washing the vehicle,also refer – comfort closing with comfort Windows Wind deflector Width, refer to Wheels and tires to refer Wheelbase, Wheel/tire replacement, refer Wheel/tire damage Wheel/tire combination, refer Welcome lamps Weights Website BMW flashes news Weather Wear indicatorstires, in refer "WB" Waveband forradio – opening andclosing, – convenient operation – cleaning, refer to Wiper Wiper to refer – cleaning, Windshield – rear window, Convertible – opening andclosing, – defrosting, refer to refer – defrosting, – nozzles washer neck for – filler – capacities, reservoir refer to Rain – automatic, wash Windshield toHead-Up refer – displays, – wiper system – wiper fluid – washer Driving through water brochure to Caring for your vehicle access Dimensions Dimensions towheels New tires and towheels New tires and to Minimum tread depth Convertible system Coupe Defrosting windows fluid sensor Display 158 217 237 38 64 37 64 65 96 38 , 166 39 65 235 235 4 45 64 102 210 213 162 237 110 166 31 126 , 214 214 213 39 32 Windshield wipers, refer refer wipers, to Windshield "Zoom" with BMW Night BMW with "Zoom" Z settings, toPersonal – refer programmable– buttons on Your individual vehicle Y replacing– bulbs Xenon lamps X Windshield wipers, refer refer wipers, to Windshield Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer engine the in Working Word matching principle for to refer decoration, Wood "With highways"for – windshield washer – washer fluid – rain sensor Wiper system – replacing – care, refer Caring to for your blades Wiper – storage limit speed setting – Winter tires – care, refer Caring to for your wiper blades replacing system, Washer Vision Profile steering wheel Wiper system to Onboard tool kit tool to Onboard compartment navigation brochure vehicle your for Caring systemnavigation nozzles vehicle brochure vehicle brochure 259 100 29 215 65 223 215 145 64 224 65 64 223 216 64 55 224 144 81 223

Reference Mobility Communications Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance

*BL0014242005* bmwusa.com More about BMW Driving Machine Driving The Ultimate The

01 41 0 014 242 ue